blob: f0de5935a252753d9b23c2b6444c5e6c7f4d1c26 [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001/* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
2 *
3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar
4 *
5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
8 */
9
10/*
11 * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere
12 */
13
14#include "vim.h"
15#include "version.h"
16
17#ifdef HAVE_FCNTL_H
18# include <fcntl.h> /* for chdir() */
19#endif
20
21static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir));
22static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name));
23#if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
24static char_u *remove_tail_with_ext __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *ext));
25#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000026static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u *src));
27
28/*
29 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line.
30 */
31 int
32get_indent()
33{
34 return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
35}
36
37/*
38 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum".
39 */
40 int
41get_indent_lnum(lnum)
42 linenr_T lnum;
43{
44 return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
45}
46
47#if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO)
48/*
49 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer
50 * "buf".
51 */
52 int
53get_indent_buf(buf, lnum)
54 buf_T *buf;
55 linenr_T lnum;
56{
57 return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts);
58}
59#endif
60
61/*
62 * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with
63 * 'tabstop' at "ts"
64 */
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +000065 int
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000066get_indent_str(ptr, ts)
67 char_u *ptr;
68 int ts;
69{
70 int count = 0;
71
72 for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr)
73 {
74 if (*ptr == TAB) /* count a tab for what it is worth */
75 count += ts - (count % ts);
76 else if (*ptr == ' ')
77 ++count; /* count a space for one */
78 else
79 break;
80 }
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +000081 return count;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000082}
83
84/*
85 * Set the indent of the current line.
86 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
87 * Caller must take care of undo.
88 * "flags":
89 * SIN_CHANGED: call changed_bytes() if the line was changed.
90 * SIN_INSERT: insert the indent in front of the line.
91 * SIN_UNDO: save line for undo before changing it.
92 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
93 */
94 int
95set_indent(size, flags)
96 int size;
97 int flags;
98{
99 char_u *p;
100 char_u *newline;
101 char_u *oldline;
102 char_u *s;
103 int todo;
104 int ind_len;
105 int line_len;
106 int doit = FALSE;
107 int ind_done;
108 int tab_pad;
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000109 int retval = FALSE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000110
111 /*
112 * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of
113 * characters needed for the indent.
114 */
115 todo = size;
116 ind_len = 0;
117 p = oldline = ml_get_curline();
118
119 /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it
120 * isn't already set */
121
122 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
123 if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
124 {
125 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
126 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
127 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
128 {
129 ind_done = 0;
130
131 /* count as many characters as we can use */
132 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
133 {
134 if (*p == TAB)
135 {
136 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
137 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
138 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
139 if (todo < tab_pad)
140 break;
141 todo -= tab_pad;
142 ++ind_len;
143 ind_done += tab_pad;
144 }
145 else
146 {
147 --todo;
148 ++ind_len;
149 ++ind_done;
150 }
151 ++p;
152 }
153
154 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
155 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
156 if (todo >= tab_pad)
157 {
158 doit = TRUE;
159 todo -= tab_pad;
160 ++ind_len;
161 /* ind_done += tab_pad; */
162 }
163 }
164
165 /* count tabs required for indent */
166 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
167 {
168 if (*p != TAB)
169 doit = TRUE;
170 else
171 ++p;
172 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
173 ++ind_len;
174 /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */
175 }
176 }
177 /* count spaces required for indent */
178 while (todo > 0)
179 {
180 if (*p != ' ')
181 doit = TRUE;
182 else
183 ++p;
184 --todo;
185 ++ind_len;
186 /* ++ind_done; */
187 }
188
189 /* Return if the indent is OK already. */
190 if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT))
191 return FALSE;
192
193 /* Allocate memory for the new line. */
194 if (flags & SIN_INSERT)
195 p = oldline;
196 else
197 p = skipwhite(p);
198 line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1;
199 newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
200 if (newline == NULL)
201 return FALSE;
202
203 /* Put the characters in the new line. */
204 s = newline;
205 todo = size;
206 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
207 if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
208 {
209 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
210 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
211 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
212 {
213 p = oldline;
214 ind_done = 0;
215
216 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
217 {
218 if (*p == TAB)
219 {
220 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
221 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
222 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
223 if (todo < tab_pad)
224 break;
225 todo -= tab_pad;
226 ind_done += tab_pad;
227 }
228 else
229 {
230 --todo;
231 ++ind_done;
232 }
233 *s++ = *p++;
234 }
235
236 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
237 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
238 if (todo >= tab_pad)
239 {
240 *s++ = TAB;
241 todo -= tab_pad;
242 }
243
244 p = skipwhite(p);
245 }
246
247 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
248 {
249 *s++ = TAB;
250 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
251 }
252 }
253 while (todo > 0)
254 {
255 *s++ = ' ';
256 --todo;
257 }
258 mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len);
259
260 /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */
261 if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK)
262 {
263 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE);
264 if (flags & SIN_CHANGED)
265 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
266 /* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */
267 if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum
268 && saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline))
269 saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (p - oldline);
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000270 retval = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000271 }
272 else
273 vim_free(newline);
274
275 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000276 return retval;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000277}
278
279/*
280 * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size)
281 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
282 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
283 */
284 static int
285copy_indent(size, src)
286 int size;
287 char_u *src;
288{
289 char_u *p = NULL;
290 char_u *line = NULL;
291 char_u *s;
292 int todo;
293 int ind_len;
294 int line_len = 0;
295 int tab_pad;
296 int ind_done;
297 int round;
298
299 /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent
300 * Round 2: copy the characters. */
301 for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round)
302 {
303 todo = size;
304 ind_len = 0;
305 ind_done = 0;
306 s = src;
307
308 /* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */
309 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s))
310 {
311 if (*s == TAB)
312 {
313 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
314 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
315 /* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
316 if (todo < tab_pad)
317 break;
318 todo -= tab_pad;
319 ind_done += tab_pad;
320 }
321 else
322 {
323 --todo;
324 ++ind_done;
325 }
326 ++ind_len;
327 if (round == 2)
328 *p++ = *s;
329 ++s;
330 }
331
332 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
333 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
334 if (todo >= tab_pad)
335 {
336 todo -= tab_pad;
337 ++ind_len;
338 if (round == 2)
339 *p++ = TAB;
340 }
341
342 /* Add tabs required for indent */
343 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
344 {
345 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
346 ++ind_len;
347 if (round == 2)
348 *p++ = TAB;
349 }
350
351 /* Count/add spaces required for indent */
352 while (todo > 0)
353 {
354 --todo;
355 ++ind_len;
356 if (round == 2)
357 *p++ = ' ';
358 }
359
360 if (round == 1)
361 {
362 /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent
363 * and the rest of the line. */
364 line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1;
365 line = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
366 if (line == NULL)
367 return FALSE;
368 p = line;
369 }
370 }
371
372 /* Append the original line */
373 mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len);
374
375 /* Replace the line */
376 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE);
377
378 /* Put the cursor after the indent. */
379 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
380 return TRUE;
381}
382
383/*
384 * Return the indent of the current line after a number. Return -1 if no
385 * number was found. Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list.
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000386 * Since a pattern is used it can actually handle more than numbers.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000387 */
388 int
389get_number_indent(lnum)
390 linenr_T lnum;
391{
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000392 colnr_T col;
393 pos_T pos;
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000394 regmmatch_T regmatch;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000395
396 if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
397 return -1;
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000398 pos.lnum = 0;
399 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(curbuf->b_p_flp, RE_MAGIC);
400 if (regmatch.regprog != NULL)
401 {
402 regmatch.rmm_ic = FALSE;
Bram Moolenaar3b56eb32005-07-11 22:40:32 +0000403 regmatch.rmm_maxcol = 0;
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000404 if (vim_regexec_multi(&regmatch, curwin, curbuf, lnum, (colnr_T)0))
405 {
406 pos.lnum = regmatch.endpos[0].lnum + lnum;
407 pos.col = regmatch.endpos[0].col;
408#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
409 pos.coladd = 0;
410#endif
411 }
412 vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
413 }
414
415 if (pos.lnum == 0 || *ml_get_pos(&pos) == NUL)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000416 return -1;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000417 getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
418 return (int)col;
419}
420
421#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT)
422
423static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line));
424
425/*
426 * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'.
427 */
428 static int
429cin_is_cinword(line)
430 char_u *line;
431{
432 char_u *cinw;
433 char_u *cinw_buf;
434 int cinw_len;
435 int retval = FALSE;
436 int len;
437
438 cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1;
439 cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len);
440 if (cinw_buf != NULL)
441 {
442 line = skipwhite(line);
443 for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; )
444 {
445 len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ",");
446 if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0
447 && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1])))
448 {
449 retval = TRUE;
450 break;
451 }
452 }
453 vim_free(cinw_buf);
454 }
455 return retval;
456}
457#endif
458
459/*
460 * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line.
461 *
462 * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the
463 * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line.
464 *
465 * Caller must take care of undo. Since VREPLACE may affect any number of
466 * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a
467 * new line.
468 * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES delete spaces after cursor
469 * OPENLINE_DO_COM format comments
470 * OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL keep trailing spaces
471 * OPENLINE_MARKFIX adjust mark positions after the line break
472 *
473 * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure
474 */
475 int
476open_line(dir, flags, old_indent)
477 int dir; /* FORWARD or BACKWARD */
478 int flags;
479 int old_indent; /* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */
480{
481 char_u *saved_line; /* copy of the original line */
482 char_u *next_line = NULL; /* copy of the next line */
483 char_u *p_extra = NULL; /* what goes to next line */
484 int less_cols = 0; /* less columns for mark in new line */
485 int less_cols_off = 0; /* columns to skip for mark adjust */
486 pos_T old_cursor; /* old cursor position */
487 int newcol = 0; /* new cursor column */
488 int newindent = 0; /* auto-indent of the new line */
489 int n;
490 int trunc_line = FALSE; /* truncate current line afterwards */
491 int retval = FALSE; /* return value, default is FAIL */
492#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
493 int extra_len = 0; /* length of p_extra string */
494 int lead_len; /* length of comment leader */
495 char_u *lead_flags; /* position in 'comments' for comment leader */
496 char_u *leader = NULL; /* copy of comment leader */
497#endif
498 char_u *allocated = NULL; /* allocated memory */
499#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \
500 || defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
501 char_u *p;
502#endif
503 int saved_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */
504#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
505 pos_T *pos;
506#endif
507#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
508 int do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si
509# ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
510 && !curbuf->b_p_cin
511# endif
512 );
513 int no_si = FALSE; /* reset did_si afterwards */
514 int first_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */
515#endif
516#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
517 int vreplace_mode;
518#endif
519 int did_append; /* appended a new line */
520 int saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */
521
522 /*
523 * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it
524 */
525 saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
526 if (saved_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */
527 return FALSE;
528
529#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
530 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
531 {
532 /*
533 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be
534 * starting to replace. First make the new line empty and let vim play
535 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content. Then
536 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the
537 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto
538 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right
539 * stuff onto the replace stack. -- webb.
540 */
541 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count)
542 next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1));
543 else
544 next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
545 if (next_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */
546 goto theend;
547
548 /*
549 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts
550 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the
551 * line onto the replace stack. We'll push any other characters that
552 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent
553 * etc) a bit later.
554 */
555 replace_push(NUL); /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */
556 replace_push(NUL);
557 p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
558 while (*p != NUL)
559 replace_push(*p++);
560 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
561 }
562#endif
563
564 if ((State & INSERT)
565#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
566 && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
567#endif
568 )
569 {
570 p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
571#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
572 if (do_si) /* need first char after new line break */
573 {
574 p = skipwhite(p_extra);
575 first_char = *p;
576 }
577#endif
578#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
579 extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra);
580#endif
581 saved_char = *p_extra;
582 *p_extra = NUL;
583 }
584
585 u_clearline(); /* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */
586#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
587 did_si = FALSE;
588#endif
589 ai_col = 0;
590
591 /*
592 * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on
593 * the prior line, and it should be truncated. Do this even if 'ai' is not
594 * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai.
595 */
596 if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai)
597 trunc_line = TRUE;
598
599 /*
600 * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what
601 * indent to use for the new line.
602 */
603 if (curbuf->b_p_ai
604#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
605 || do_si
606#endif
607 )
608 {
609 /*
610 * count white space on current line
611 */
612 newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
613 if (newindent == 0)
614 newindent = old_indent; /* for ^^D command in insert mode */
615
616#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
617 /*
618 * Do smart indenting.
619 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD)
620 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{'
621 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line
622 * "if (condition) {"
623 */
624 if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL
625 && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{'))
626 {
627 char_u *ptr;
628 char_u last_char;
629
630 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
631 ptr = saved_line;
632# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
633 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
634 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
635 else
636 lead_len = 0;
637# endif
638 if (dir == FORWARD)
639 {
640 /*
641 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
642 * recognised as comments.
643 */
644 if (
645# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
646 lead_len == 0 &&
647# endif
648 ptr[0] == '#')
649 {
650 while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
651 ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
652 newindent = get_indent();
653 }
654# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
655 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
656 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
657 else
658 lead_len = 0;
659 if (lead_len > 0)
660 {
661 /*
662 * This case gets the following right:
663 * \*
664 * * A comment (read '\' as '/').
665 * *\
666 * #define IN_THE_WAY
667 * This should line up here;
668 */
669 p = skipwhite(ptr);
670 if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*')
671 p++;
672 if (p[0] == '*')
673 {
674 for (p++; *p; p++)
675 {
676 if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*')
677 {
678 /*
679 * End of C comment, indent should line up
680 * with the line containing the start of
681 * the comment
682 */
683 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
684 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
685 {
686 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
687 newindent = get_indent();
688 }
689 }
690 }
691 }
692 }
693 else /* Not a comment line */
694# endif
695 {
696 /* Find last non-blank in line */
697 p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1;
698 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
699 --p;
700 last_char = *p;
701
702 /*
703 * find the character just before the '{' or ';'
704 */
705 if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';')
706 {
707 if (p > ptr)
708 --p;
709 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
710 --p;
711 }
712 /*
713 * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple
714 * lines. eg:
715 * if (condition &&
716 * condition) {
717 * Should line up here!
718 * }
719 */
720 if (*p == ')')
721 {
722 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
723 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL)
724 {
725 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
726 newindent = get_indent();
727 ptr = ml_get_curline();
728 }
729 }
730 /*
731 * If last character is '{' do indent, without
732 * checking for "if" and the like.
733 */
734 if (last_char == '{')
735 {
736 did_si = TRUE; /* do indent */
737 no_si = TRUE; /* don't delete it when '{' typed */
738 }
739 /*
740 * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'.
741 * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or
742 * '}'.
743 */
744 else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}'
745 && cin_is_cinword(ptr))
746 did_si = TRUE;
747 }
748 }
749 else /* dir == BACKWARD */
750 {
751 /*
752 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
753 * recognised as comments.
754 */
755 if (
756# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
757 lead_len == 0 &&
758# endif
759 ptr[0] == '#')
760 {
761 int was_backslashed = FALSE;
762
763 while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) &&
764 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
765 {
766 if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\')
767 was_backslashed = TRUE;
768 else
769 was_backslashed = FALSE;
770 ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
771 }
772 if (was_backslashed)
773 newindent = 0; /* Got to end of file */
774 else
775 newindent = get_indent();
776 }
777 p = skipwhite(ptr);
778 if (*p == '}') /* if line starts with '}': do indent */
779 did_si = TRUE;
780 else /* can delete indent when '{' typed */
781 can_si_back = TRUE;
782 }
783 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
784 }
785 if (do_si)
786 can_si = TRUE;
787#endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */
788
789 did_ai = TRUE;
790 }
791
792#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
793 /*
794 * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader.
795 * This may then be inserted in front of the new line.
796 */
797 end_comment_pending = NUL;
798 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
799 lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD);
800 else
801 lead_len = 0;
802 if (lead_len > 0)
803 {
804 char_u *lead_repl = NULL; /* replaces comment leader */
805 int lead_repl_len = 0; /* length of *lead_repl */
806 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */
807 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */
808 char_u *comment_end = NULL; /* where lead_end has been found */
809 int extra_space = FALSE; /* append extra space */
810 int current_flag;
811 int require_blank = FALSE; /* requires blank after middle */
812 char_u *p2;
813
814 /*
815 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not
816 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader.
817 */
818 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
819 {
820 if (*p == COM_BLANK)
821 {
822 require_blank = TRUE;
823 continue;
824 }
825 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
826 {
827 current_flag = *p;
828 if (*p == COM_START)
829 {
830 /*
831 * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader.
832 */
833 if (dir == BACKWARD)
834 {
835 lead_len = 0;
836 break;
837 }
838
839 /* find start of middle part */
840 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
841 require_blank = FALSE;
842 }
843
844 /*
845 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader.
846 */
847 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of middle flags */
848 {
849 if (*p == COM_BLANK)
850 require_blank = TRUE;
851 ++p;
852 }
853 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
854
855 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of end flags */
856 {
857 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
858 if (*p == COM_AUTO_END)
859 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
860 ++p;
861 }
862 n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
863
864 if (end_comment_pending == -1) /* we can set it now */
865 end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1];
866
867 /*
868 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use
869 * the comment leader.
870 */
871 if (dir == FORWARD)
872 {
873 for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p)
874 if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0)
875 {
876 comment_end = p;
877 lead_len = 0;
878 break;
879 }
880 }
881
882 /*
883 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader.
884 */
885 if (lead_len > 0)
886 {
887 if (current_flag == COM_START)
888 {
889 lead_repl = lead_middle;
890 lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
891 }
892
893 /*
894 * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start
895 * comment leader, then put a space after the middle
896 * comment leader on the next line.
897 */
898 if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1])
899 && ((p_extra != NULL
900 && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len)
901 || (p_extra == NULL
902 && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL)
903 || require_blank))
904 extra_space = TRUE;
905 }
906 break;
907 }
908 if (*p == COM_END)
909 {
910 /*
911 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader.
912 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the
913 * start (for C-comments).
914 */
915 if (dir == FORWARD)
916 {
917 comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line);
918 lead_len = 0;
919 break;
920 }
921
922 /*
923 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader.
924 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards.
925 */
926 while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',')
927 --p;
928 for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com
929 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl)
930 ;
931 lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl);
932
933 /* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on
934 * the comment-end */
935 extra_space = TRUE;
936
937 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
938 for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++)
939 {
940 if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END)
941 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
942 }
943 if (end_comment_pending == -1)
944 {
945 /* Find last character in end-comment string */
946 while (*p2 && *p2 != ',')
947 p2++;
948 end_comment_pending = p2[-1];
949 }
950 break;
951 }
952 if (*p == COM_FIRST)
953 {
954 /*
955 * Comment leader for first line only: Don't repeat leader
956 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o".
957 */
958 if (dir == BACKWARD)
959 lead_len = 0;
960 else
961 {
962 lead_repl = (char_u *)"";
963 lead_repl_len = 0;
964 }
965 break;
966 }
967 }
968 if (lead_len)
969 {
970 /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */
971 leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space +
972 extra_len + 1);
973 allocated = leader; /* remember to free it later */
974
975 if (leader == NULL)
976 lead_len = 0;
977 else
978 {
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +0000979 vim_strncpy(leader, saved_line, lead_len);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000980
981 /*
982 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted
983 */
984 if (lead_repl != NULL)
985 {
986 int c = 0;
987 int off = 0;
988
989 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
990 {
991 if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT)
992 c = *p;
993 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
994 off = getdigits(&p);
995 }
996 if (c == COM_RIGHT) /* right adjusted leader */
997 {
998 /* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */
999 for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader
1000 && vim_iswhite(*p); --p)
1001 ;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001002 ++p;
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001003
1004#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1005 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1006 * screen characters, not bytes. */
1007 {
1008 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1009 lead_repl_len);
1010 int old_size = 0;
1011 char_u *endp = p;
1012 int l;
1013
1014 while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader)
1015 {
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00001016 mb_ptr_back(leader, p);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001017 old_size += ptr2cells(p);
1018 }
1019 l = lead_repl_len - (endp - p);
1020 if (l != 0)
1021 mch_memmove(endp + l, endp,
1022 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp));
1023 lead_len += l;
1024 }
1025#else
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001026 if (p < leader + lead_repl_len)
1027 p = leader;
1028 else
1029 p -= lead_repl_len;
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001030#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001031 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1032 if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len)
1033 p[lead_repl_len] = NUL;
1034
1035 /* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */
1036 while (--p >= leader)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001037 {
1038#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1039 int l = mb_head_off(leader, p);
1040
1041 if (l > 1)
1042 {
1043 p -= l;
1044 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1045 {
1046 p[1] = ' ';
1047 --l;
1048 }
1049 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1,
1050 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1)));
1051 lead_len -= l;
1052 *p = ' ';
1053 }
1054 else
1055#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001056 if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1057 *p = ' ';
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001058 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001059 }
1060 else /* left adjusted leader */
1061 {
1062 p = skipwhite(leader);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001063#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1064 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1065 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is
1066 * not to be overwritten. */
1067 {
1068 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1069 lead_repl_len);
1070 int i;
1071 int l;
1072
1073 for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l)
1074 {
1075 l = mb_ptr2len_check(p + i);
1076 if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size)
1077 break;
1078 }
1079 if (i != lead_repl_len)
1080 {
1081 mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i,
1082 (size_t)(lead_len - i - (leader - p)));
1083 lead_len += lead_repl_len - i;
1084 }
1085 }
1086#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001087 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1088
1089 /* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old
1090 * leader by spaces. Keep Tabs, the indent must
1091 * remain the same. */
1092 for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p)
1093 if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1094 {
1095 /* Don't put a space before a TAB. */
1096 if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB)
1097 {
1098 --lead_len;
1099 mch_memmove(p, p + 1,
1100 (leader + lead_len) - p);
1101 }
1102 else
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001103 {
1104#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1105 int l = mb_ptr2len_check(p);
1106
1107 if (l > 1)
1108 {
1109 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1110 {
1111 /* Replace a double-wide char with
1112 * two spaces */
1113 --l;
1114 *p++ = ' ';
1115 }
1116 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l,
1117 (leader + lead_len) - p);
1118 lead_len -= l - 1;
1119 }
1120#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001121 *p = ' ';
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001122 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001123 }
1124 *p = NUL;
1125 }
1126
1127 /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */
1128 if (curbuf->b_p_ai
1129#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1130 || do_si
1131#endif
1132 )
1133 newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
1134
1135 /* Add the indent offset */
1136 if (newindent + off < 0)
1137 {
1138 off = -newindent;
1139 newindent = 0;
1140 }
1141 else
1142 newindent += off;
1143
1144 /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that
1145 * alignment remains equal. */
1146 while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0
1147 && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ')
1148 {
1149 /* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */
1150 if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL)
1151 break;
1152 --lead_len;
1153 --off;
1154 }
1155
1156 /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an
1157 * extra space */
1158 if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1]))
1159 extra_space = FALSE;
1160 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1161 }
1162
1163 if (extra_space)
1164 {
1165 leader[lead_len++] = ' ';
1166 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1167 }
1168
1169 newcol = lead_len;
1170
1171 /*
1172 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that
1173 * is in the comment leader
1174 */
1175 if (newindent
1176#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1177 || did_si
1178#endif
1179 )
1180 {
1181 while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader))
1182 {
1183 --lead_len;
1184 --newcol;
1185 ++leader;
1186 }
1187 }
1188
1189 }
1190#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1191 did_si = can_si = FALSE;
1192#endif
1193 }
1194 else if (comment_end != NULL)
1195 {
1196 /*
1197 * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader.
1198 * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal
1199 * indent to align with the line containing the start of the
1200 * comment.
1201 */
1202 if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' &&
1203 (curbuf->b_p_ai
1204#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1205 || do_si
1206#endif
1207 ))
1208 {
1209 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1210 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line);
1211 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
1212 {
1213 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
1214 newindent = get_indent();
1215 }
1216 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1217 }
1218 }
1219 }
1220#endif
1221
1222 /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */
1223 if (p_extra != NULL)
1224 {
1225 *p_extra = saved_char; /* restore char that NUL replaced */
1226
1227 /*
1228 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first
1229 * non-blank.
1230 *
1231 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack,
1232 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered.
1233 */
1234 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1235 replace_push(NUL); /* end of extra blanks */
1236 if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES))
1237 {
1238 while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t')
1239#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1240 && (!enc_utf8
1241 || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1)))
1242#endif
1243 )
1244 {
1245 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1246 replace_push(*p_extra);
1247 ++p_extra;
1248 ++less_cols_off;
1249 }
1250 }
1251 if (*p_extra != NUL)
1252 did_ai = FALSE; /* append some text, don't truncate now */
1253
1254 /* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */
1255 less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line);
1256 }
1257
1258 if (p_extra == NULL)
1259 p_extra = (char_u *)""; /* append empty line */
1260
1261#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1262 /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */
1263 if (lead_len)
1264 {
1265 STRCAT(leader, p_extra);
1266 p_extra = leader;
1267 did_ai = TRUE; /* So truncating blanks works with comments */
1268 less_cols -= lead_len;
1269 }
1270 else
1271 end_comment_pending = NUL; /* turns out there was no leader */
1272#endif
1273
1274 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1275 if (dir == BACKWARD)
1276 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1277#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1278 if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count)
1279#endif
1280 {
1281 if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE)
1282 == FAIL)
1283 goto theend;
1284 /* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding
1285 * with markers. */
1286 mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L);
1287 did_append = TRUE;
1288 }
1289#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1290 else
1291 {
1292 /*
1293 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line.
1294 */
1295 curwin->w_cursor.lnum++;
1296 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed)
1297 {
1298 /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL
1299 * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice.
1300 */
1301 (void)u_save_cursor(); /* errors are ignored! */
1302 vr_lines_changed++;
1303 }
1304 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE);
1305 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
1306 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
1307 did_append = FALSE;
1308 }
1309#endif
1310
1311 if (newindent
1312#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1313 || did_si
1314#endif
1315 )
1316 {
1317 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1318#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1319 if (did_si)
1320 {
1321 if (p_sr)
1322 newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1323 newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1324 }
1325#endif
1326 /* Copy the indent only if expand tab is disabled */
1327 if (curbuf->b_p_ci && !curbuf->b_p_et)
1328 {
1329 (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line);
1330
1331 /*
1332 * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing
1333 * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve
1334 * it. It gets restored at the function end.
1335 */
1336 curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE;
1337 }
1338 else
1339 (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT);
1340 less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col;
1341
1342 ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1343
1344 /*
1345 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must
1346 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS
1347 */
1348 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1349 for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n)
1350 replace_push(NUL);
1351 newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col;
1352#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1353 if (no_si)
1354 did_si = FALSE;
1355#endif
1356 }
1357
1358#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1359 /*
1360 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be
1361 * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS.
1362 */
1363 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1364 while (lead_len-- > 0)
1365 replace_push(NUL);
1366#endif
1367
1368 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1369
1370 if (dir == FORWARD)
1371 {
1372 if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT))
1373 {
1374 /* truncate current line at cursor */
1375 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
1376 /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */
1377 if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL))
1378 truncate_spaces(saved_line);
1379 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE);
1380 saved_line = NULL;
1381 if (did_append)
1382 {
1383 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col,
1384 curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L);
1385 did_append = FALSE;
1386
1387 /* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */
1388 if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX)
1389 mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
1390 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off,
1391 1L, (long)-less_cols);
1392 }
1393 else
1394 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
1395 }
1396
1397 /*
1398 * Put the cursor on the new line. Careful: the scrollup() above may
1399 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor.
1400 */
1401 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1;
1402 }
1403 if (did_append)
1404 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L);
1405
1406 curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol;
1407#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1408 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1409#endif
1410
1411#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1412 /*
1413 * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop
1414 * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in
1415 * normal INSERT mode.
1416 */
1417 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1418 {
1419 vreplace_mode = State; /* So we know to put things right later */
1420 State = INSERT;
1421 }
1422 else
1423 vreplace_mode = 0;
1424#endif
1425#ifdef FEAT_LISP
1426 /*
1427 * May do lisp indenting.
1428 */
1429 if (!p_paste
1430# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1431 && leader == NULL
1432# endif
1433 && curbuf->b_p_lisp
1434 && curbuf->b_p_ai)
1435 {
1436 fixthisline(get_lisp_indent);
1437 p = ml_get_curline();
1438 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1439 }
1440#endif
1441#ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
1442 /*
1443 * May do indenting after opening a new line.
1444 */
1445 if (!p_paste
1446 && (curbuf->b_p_cin
1447# ifdef FEAT_EVAL
1448 || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL
1449# endif
1450 )
1451 && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD
1452 ? KEY_OPEN_FORW
1453 : KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)))
1454 {
1455 do_c_expr_indent();
1456 p = ml_get_curline();
1457 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1458 }
1459#endif
1460#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1461 if (vreplace_mode != 0)
1462 State = vreplace_mode;
1463#endif
1464
1465#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1466 /*
1467 * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the
1468 * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff
1469 * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()).
1470 */
1471 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1472 {
1473 /* Put new line in p_extra */
1474 p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
1475 if (p_extra == NULL)
1476 goto theend;
1477
1478 /* Put back original line */
1479 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE);
1480
1481 /* Insert new stuff into line again */
1482 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
1483#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1484 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1485#endif
1486 ins_bytes(p_extra); /* will call changed_bytes() */
1487 vim_free(p_extra);
1488 next_line = NULL;
1489 }
1490#endif
1491
1492 retval = TRUE; /* success! */
1493theend:
1494 curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi;
1495 vim_free(saved_line);
1496 vim_free(next_line);
1497 vim_free(allocated);
1498 return retval;
1499}
1500
1501#if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO)
1502/*
1503 * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string
1504 * which introduces a comment. If this string is not a comment then 0 is
1505 * returned.
1506 * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized
1507 * comment leader.
1508 * "backward" must be true for the "O" command.
1509 */
1510 int
1511get_leader_len(line, flags, backward)
1512 char_u *line;
1513 char_u **flags;
1514 int backward;
1515{
1516 int i, j;
1517 int got_com = FALSE;
1518 int found_one;
1519 char_u part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* buffer for one option part */
1520 char_u *string; /* pointer to comment string */
1521 char_u *list;
1522
1523 i = 0;
1524 while (vim_iswhite(line[i])) /* leading white space is ignored */
1525 ++i;
1526
1527 /*
1528 * Repeat to match several nested comment strings.
1529 */
1530 while (line[i])
1531 {
1532 /*
1533 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match
1534 */
1535 found_one = FALSE;
1536 for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; )
1537 {
1538 /*
1539 * Get one option part into part_buf[]. Advance list to next one.
1540 * put string at start of string.
1541 */
1542 if (!got_com && flags != NULL) /* remember where flags started */
1543 *flags = list;
1544 (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
1545 string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':');
1546 if (string == NULL) /* missing ':', ignore this part */
1547 continue;
1548 *string++ = NUL; /* isolate flags from string */
1549
1550 /*
1551 * When already found a nested comment, only accept further
1552 * nested comments.
1553 */
1554 if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1555 continue;
1556
1557 /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */
1558 if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL)
1559 continue;
1560
1561 /*
1562 * Line contents and string must match.
1563 * When string starts with white space, must have some white space
1564 * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of
1565 * TABs and spaces).
1566 */
1567 if (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1568 {
1569 if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1]))
1570 continue;
1571 while (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1572 ++string;
1573 }
1574 for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j)
1575 ;
1576 if (string[j] != NUL)
1577 continue;
1578
1579 /*
1580 * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an
1581 * end-of-line after the string in the line.
1582 */
1583 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL
1584 && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL)
1585 continue;
1586
1587 /*
1588 * We have found a match, stop searching.
1589 */
1590 i += j;
1591 got_com = TRUE;
1592 found_one = TRUE;
1593 break;
1594 }
1595
1596 /*
1597 * No match found, stop scanning.
1598 */
1599 if (!found_one)
1600 break;
1601
1602 /*
1603 * Include any trailing white space.
1604 */
1605 while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))
1606 ++i;
1607
1608 /*
1609 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here.
1610 */
1611 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1612 break;
1613 }
1614 return (got_com ? i : 0);
1615}
1616#endif
1617
1618/*
1619 * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum".
1620 */
1621 int
1622plines(lnum)
1623 linenr_T lnum;
1624{
1625 return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1626}
1627
1628 int
1629plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight)
1630 win_T *wp;
1631 linenr_T lnum;
1632 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */
1633{
1634#if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO)
1635 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result
1636 * is one line anyway. */
1637 return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1638}
1639
1640 int
1641plines_nofill(lnum)
1642 linenr_T lnum;
1643{
1644 return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1645}
1646
1647 int
1648plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight)
1649 win_T *wp;
1650 linenr_T lnum;
1651 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */
1652{
1653#endif
1654 int lines;
1655
1656 if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1657 return 1;
1658
1659#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1660 if (wp->w_width == 0)
1661 return 1;
1662#endif
1663
1664#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1665 /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */
1666 /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */
1667 if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE)
1668 return 1;
1669#endif
1670
1671 lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum);
1672 if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height)
1673 return (int)wp->w_height;
1674 return lines;
1675}
1676
1677/*
1678 * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window
1679 * "wp". Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'.
1680 */
1681 int
1682plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum)
1683 win_T *wp;
1684 linenr_T lnum;
1685{
1686 char_u *s;
1687 long col;
1688 int width;
1689
1690 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1691 if (*s == NUL) /* empty line */
1692 return 1;
1693 col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL);
1694
1695 /*
1696 * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one
1697 * extra column.
1698 */
1699 if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL)
1700 col += 1;
1701
1702 /*
1703 * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'.
1704 */
1705 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1706 if (width <= 0)
1707 return 32000;
1708 if (col <= width)
1709 return 1;
1710 col -= width;
1711 width += win_col_off2(wp);
1712 return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1;
1713}
1714
1715/*
1716 * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines
1717 * used from the start of the line to the given column number.
1718 */
1719 int
1720plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column)
1721 win_T *wp;
1722 linenr_T lnum;
1723 long column;
1724{
1725 long col;
1726 char_u *s;
1727 int lines = 0;
1728 int width;
1729
1730#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1731 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result
1732 * is one line anyway. */
1733 lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1734#endif
1735
1736 if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1737 return lines + 1;
1738
1739#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1740 if (wp->w_width == 0)
1741 return lines + 1;
1742#endif
1743
1744 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1745
1746 col = 0;
1747 while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0)
1748 {
1749 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL);
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00001750 mb_ptr_adv(s);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001751 }
1752
1753 /*
1754 * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in
1755 * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last
1756 * screen position of the TAB. This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps
1757 * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of
1758 * 'ts') -- webb.
1759 */
1760 if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1))
1761 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1;
1762
1763 /*
1764 * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc.
1765 */
1766 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1767 if (width > 0)
1768 {
1769 lines += 1;
1770 if (col >= width)
1771 lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp));
1772 if (lines <= wp->w_height)
1773 return lines;
1774 }
1775 return (int)(wp->w_height); /* maximum length */
1776}
1777
1778 int
1779plines_m_win(wp, first, last)
1780 win_T *wp;
1781 linenr_T first, last;
1782{
1783 int count = 0;
1784
1785 while (first <= last)
1786 {
1787#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1788 int x;
1789
1790 /* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines
1791 * that are maybe folded. */
1792 x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL);
1793 if (x > 0)
1794 {
1795 ++count; /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */
1796 first += x;
1797 }
1798 else
1799#endif
1800 {
1801#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1802 if (first == wp->w_topline)
1803 count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill;
1804 else
1805#endif
1806 count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE);
1807 ++first;
1808 }
1809 }
1810 return (count);
1811}
1812
1813#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO)
1814/*
1815 * Insert string "p" at the cursor position. Stops at a NUL byte.
1816 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1817 */
1818 void
1819ins_bytes(p)
1820 char_u *p;
1821{
1822 ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p));
1823}
1824#endif
1825
1826#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \
1827 || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1828/*
1829 * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position.
1830 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1831 */
1832 void
1833ins_bytes_len(p, len)
1834 char_u *p;
1835 int len;
1836{
1837 int i;
1838# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1839 int n;
1840
1841 for (i = 0; i < len; i += n)
1842 {
1843 n = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p + i);
1844 ins_char_bytes(p + i, n);
1845 }
1846# else
1847 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
1848 ins_char(p[i]);
1849# endif
1850}
1851#endif
1852
1853/*
1854 * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position.
1855 * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character.
1856 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
1857 * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must
1858 * convert bytes to a character.
1859 */
1860 void
1861ins_char(c)
1862 int c;
1863{
1864#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1865 char_u buf[MB_MAXBYTES];
1866 int n;
1867
1868 n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf);
1869
1870 /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte.
1871 * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */
1872 if (buf[0] == 0)
1873 buf[0] = '\n';
1874
1875 ins_char_bytes(buf, n);
1876}
1877
1878 void
1879ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen)
1880 char_u *buf;
1881 int charlen;
1882{
1883 int c = buf[0];
1884 int l, j;
1885#endif
1886 int newlen; /* nr of bytes inserted */
1887 int oldlen; /* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */
1888 char_u *p;
1889 char_u *newp;
1890 char_u *oldp;
1891 int linelen; /* length of old line including NUL */
1892 colnr_T col;
1893 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1894 int i;
1895
1896#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1897 /* Break tabs if needed. */
1898 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
1899 coladvance_force(getviscol());
1900#endif
1901
1902 col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1903 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
1904 linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1;
1905
1906 /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */
1907 oldlen = 0;
1908#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1909 newlen = charlen;
1910#else
1911 newlen = 1;
1912#endif
1913
1914 if (State & REPLACE_FLAG)
1915 {
1916#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1917 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1918 {
1919 colnr_T new_vcol = 0; /* init for GCC */
1920 colnr_T vcol;
1921 int old_list;
1922#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1923 char_u buf[2];
1924#endif
1925
1926 /*
1927 * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag.
1928 * Returns the old value of list, so when finished,
1929 * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this.
1930 */
1931 old_list = curwin->w_p_list;
1932 if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL)
1933 curwin->w_p_list = FALSE;
1934
1935 /*
1936 * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more
1937 * characters (zero if it's a TAB). Count the number of bytes to
1938 * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen
1939 * cells. May result in adding spaces to fill a gap.
1940 */
1941 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL);
1942#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1943 buf[0] = c;
1944 buf[1] = NUL;
1945#endif
1946 new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol);
1947 while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol)
1948 {
1949 vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol);
1950 /* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right
1951 * position. */
1952 if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB)
1953 break;
1954#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1955 oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col + oldlen);
1956#else
1957 ++oldlen;
1958#endif
1959 /* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */
1960 if (vcol > new_vcol)
1961 newlen += vcol - new_vcol;
1962 }
1963 curwin->w_p_list = old_list;
1964 }
1965 else
1966#endif
1967 if (oldp[col] != NUL)
1968 {
1969 /* normal replace */
1970#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1971 oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col);
1972#else
1973 oldlen = 1;
1974#endif
1975 }
1976
1977
1978 /* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be
1979 * put back when BS is used. The bytes of a multi-byte character are
1980 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off
1981 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */
1982 replace_push(NUL);
1983 for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i)
1984 {
1985#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1986 l = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col + i) - 1;
1987 for (j = l; j >= 0; --j)
1988 replace_push(oldp[col + i + j]);
1989 i += l;
1990#else
1991 replace_push(oldp[col + i]);
1992#endif
1993 }
1994 }
1995
1996 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen));
1997 if (newp == NULL)
1998 return;
1999
2000 /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */
2001 if (col > 0)
2002 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2003
2004 /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */
2005 p = newp + col;
2006 mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen,
2007 (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen));
2008
2009 /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */
2010#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2011 mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen);
2012 i = charlen;
2013#else
2014 *p = c;
2015 i = 1;
2016#endif
2017
2018 /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */
2019 while (i < newlen)
2020 p[i++] = ' ';
2021
2022 /* Replace the line in the buffer. */
2023 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2024
2025 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2026 changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2027
2028 /*
2029 * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly
2030 * show the match for right parens and braces.
2031 */
2032 if (p_sm && (State & INSERT)
2033 && msg_silent == 0
2034#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2035 && charlen == 1
2036#endif
2037 )
2038 showmatch(c);
2039
2040#ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
2041 if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG))
2042#endif
2043 {
2044 /* Normal insert: move cursor right */
2045#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2046 curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen;
2047#else
2048 ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
2049#endif
2050 }
2051 /*
2052 * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later.
2053 */
2054}
2055
2056/*
2057 * Insert a string at the cursor position.
2058 * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode.
2059 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2060 */
2061 void
2062ins_str(s)
2063 char_u *s;
2064{
2065 char_u *oldp, *newp;
2066 int newlen = (int)STRLEN(s);
2067 int oldlen;
2068 colnr_T col;
2069 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2070
2071#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2072 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
2073 coladvance_force(getviscol());
2074#endif
2075
2076 col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2077 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2078 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2079
2080 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1));
2081 if (newp == NULL)
2082 return;
2083 if (col > 0)
2084 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2085 mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen);
2086 mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1));
2087 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2088 changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2089 curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen;
2090}
2091
2092/*
2093 * Delete one character under the cursor.
2094 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2095 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2096 *
2097 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2098 */
2099 int
2100del_char(fixpos)
2101 int fixpos;
2102{
2103#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2104 if (has_mbyte)
2105 {
2106 /* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */
2107 mb_adjust_cursor();
2108 if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL)
2109 return FAIL;
2110 return del_chars(1L, fixpos);
2111 }
2112#endif
2113 return del_bytes(1L, fixpos);
2114}
2115
2116#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
2117/*
2118 * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes.
2119 */
2120 int
2121del_chars(count, fixpos)
2122 long count;
2123 int fixpos;
2124{
2125 long bytes = 0;
2126 long i;
2127 char_u *p;
2128 int l;
2129
2130 p = ml_get_cursor();
2131 for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i)
2132 {
2133 l = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p);
2134 bytes += l;
2135 p += l;
2136 }
2137 return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos);
2138}
2139#endif
2140
2141/*
2142 * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor.
2143 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2144 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2145 *
2146 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2147 */
2148 int
2149del_bytes(count, fixpos)
2150 long count;
2151 int fixpos;
2152{
2153 char_u *oldp, *newp;
2154 colnr_T oldlen;
2155 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2156 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2157 int was_alloced;
2158 long movelen;
2159
2160 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2161 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2162
2163 /*
2164 * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line.
2165 */
2166 if (col >= oldlen)
2167 return FAIL;
2168
2169#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2170 /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only
2171 * delete the last combining character. */
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002172 if (p_deco && enc_utf8 && utfc_ptr2len_check(oldp + col) >= count)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002173 {
2174 int c1, c2;
2175 int n;
2176
2177 (void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, &c1, &c2);
2178 if (c1 != NUL)
2179 {
2180 /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */
2181 n = col;
2182 do
2183 {
2184 col = n;
2185 count = utf_ptr2len_check(oldp + n);
2186 n += count;
2187 } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n));
2188 fixpos = 0;
2189 }
2190 }
2191#endif
2192
2193 /*
2194 * When count is too big, reduce it.
2195 */
2196 movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */
2197 if (movelen <= 1)
2198 {
2199 /*
2200 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and
2201 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2202 */
2203 if (col > 0 && fixpos)
2204 {
2205 --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2206#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2207 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
2208#endif
2209#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2210 if (has_mbyte)
2211 curwin->w_cursor.col -=
2212 (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col);
2213#endif
2214 }
2215 count = oldlen - col;
2216 movelen = 1;
2217 }
2218
2219 /*
2220 * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the
2221 * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated
2222 */
2223 was_alloced = ml_line_alloced(); /* check if oldp was allocated */
2224#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2225 if (was_alloced && usingNetbeans)
2226 netbeans_removed(curbuf, lnum, col, count);
2227 /* else is handled by ml_replace() */
2228#endif
2229 if (was_alloced)
2230 newp = oldp; /* use same allocated memory */
2231 else
2232 { /* need to allocate a new line */
2233 newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count));
2234 if (newp == NULL)
2235 return FAIL;
2236 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2237 }
2238 mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen);
2239 if (!was_alloced)
2240 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2241
2242 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2243 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2244
2245 return OK;
2246}
2247
2248/*
2249 * Delete from cursor to end of line.
2250 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2251 *
2252 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2253 */
2254 int
2255truncate_line(fixpos)
2256 int fixpos; /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */
2257{
2258 char_u *newp;
2259 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2260 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2261
2262 if (col == 0)
2263 newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
2264 else
2265 newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col);
2266
2267 if (newp == NULL)
2268 return FAIL;
2269
2270 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2271
2272 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2273 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2274
2275 /*
2276 * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2277 */
2278 if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0)
2279 --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2280
2281 return OK;
2282}
2283
2284/*
2285 * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor.
2286 * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE.
2287 */
2288 void
2289del_lines(nlines, undo)
2290 long nlines; /* number of lines to delete */
2291 int undo; /* if TRUE, prepare for undo */
2292{
2293 long n;
2294
2295 if (nlines <= 0)
2296 return;
2297
2298 /* save the deleted lines for undo */
2299 if (undo && u_savedel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, nlines) == FAIL)
2300 return;
2301
2302 for (n = 0; n < nlines; )
2303 {
2304 if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY) /* nothing to delete */
2305 break;
2306
2307 ml_delete(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE);
2308 ++n;
2309
2310 /* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */
2311 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
2312 break;
2313 }
2314 /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2315 deleted_lines_mark(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, n);
2316
2317 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
2318 check_cursor_lnum();
2319}
2320
2321 int
2322gchar_pos(pos)
2323 pos_T *pos;
2324{
2325 char_u *ptr = ml_get_pos(pos);
2326
2327#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2328 if (has_mbyte)
2329 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr);
2330#endif
2331 return (int)*ptr;
2332}
2333
2334 int
2335gchar_cursor()
2336{
2337#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2338 if (has_mbyte)
2339 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor());
2340#endif
2341 return (int)*ml_get_cursor();
2342}
2343
2344/*
2345 * Write a character at the current cursor position.
2346 * It is directly written into the block.
2347 */
2348 void
2349pchar_cursor(c)
2350 int c;
2351{
2352 *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE)
2353 + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c;
2354}
2355
2356#if 0 /* not used */
2357/*
2358 * Put *pos at end of current buffer
2359 */
2360 void
2361goto_endofbuf(pos)
2362 pos_T *pos;
2363{
2364 char_u *p;
2365
2366 pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count;
2367 pos->col = 0;
2368 p = ml_get(pos->lnum);
2369 while (*p++)
2370 ++pos->col;
2371}
2372#endif
2373
2374/*
2375 * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first
2376 * non-blank in the line.
2377 * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in
2378 * the line.
2379 */
2380 int
2381inindent(extra)
2382 int extra;
2383{
2384 char_u *ptr;
2385 colnr_T col;
2386
2387 for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col)
2388 ++ptr;
2389 if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra)
2390 return TRUE;
2391 else
2392 return FALSE;
2393}
2394
2395/*
2396 * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma.
2397 */
2398 char_u *
2399skip_to_option_part(p)
2400 char_u *p;
2401{
2402 if (*p == ',')
2403 ++p;
2404 while (*p == ' ')
2405 ++p;
2406 return p;
2407}
2408
2409/*
2410 * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed.
2411 *
2412 * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also
2413 * mark the area of the display to be redrawn.
2414 */
2415 void
2416changed()
2417{
2418#if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK)
2419 /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't
2420 * mean a change of the buffer yet. That is delayed until the
2421 * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */
2422 if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting)
2423 return;
2424 xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE;
2425#endif
2426
2427 if (!curbuf->b_changed)
2428 {
2429 int save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll;
2430
2431 change_warning(0);
2432 /* Create a swap file if that is wanted.
2433 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */
2434 if (curbuf->b_may_swap
2435#ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX
2436 && !bt_dontwrite(curbuf)
2437#endif
2438 )
2439 {
2440 ml_open_file(curbuf);
2441
2442 /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message.
2443 * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected
2444 * message. Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now,
2445 * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */
2446 if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0)
2447 {
2448 out_flush();
2449 ui_delay(2000L, TRUE);
2450 wait_return(TRUE);
2451 msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll;
2452 }
2453 }
2454 curbuf->b_changed = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00002455 ml_setflags(curbuf);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002456#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2457 check_status(curbuf);
2458#endif
2459#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2460 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */
2461#endif
2462 }
2463 ++curbuf->b_changedtick;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002464}
2465
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002466static void changedOneline __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum));
2467static void changed_lines_buf __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002468static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2469
2470/*
2471 * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer.
2472 * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2473 * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed()
2474 * - invalidates cached values
2475 */
2476 void
2477changed_bytes(lnum, col)
2478 linenr_T lnum;
2479 colnr_T col;
2480{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002481 changedOneline(curbuf, lnum);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002482 changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L);
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002483
2484#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2485 /* Diff highlighting in other diff windows may need to be updated too. */
2486 if (curwin->w_p_diff)
2487 {
2488 win_T *wp;
2489 linenr_T wlnum;
2490
2491 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2492 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2493 {
2494 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2495 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2496 if (wlnum > 0)
2497 changedOneline(wp->w_buffer, wlnum);
2498 }
2499 }
2500#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002501}
2502
2503 static void
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002504changedOneline(buf, lnum)
2505 buf_T *buf;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002506 linenr_T lnum;
2507{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002508 if (buf->b_mod_set)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002509 {
2510 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002511 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2512 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2513 else if (lnum >= buf->b_mod_bot)
2514 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002515 }
2516 else
2517 {
2518 /* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002519 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2520 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2521 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2522 buf->b_mod_xlines = 0;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002523 }
2524}
2525
2526/*
2527 * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2528 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2529 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2530 */
2531 void
2532appended_lines(lnum, count)
2533 linenr_T lnum;
2534 long count;
2535{
2536 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2537}
2538
2539/*
2540 * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2541 */
2542 void
2543appended_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2544 linenr_T lnum;
2545 long count;
2546{
2547 mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L);
2548 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2549}
2550
2551/*
2552 * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2553 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2554 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2555 */
2556 void
2557deleted_lines(lnum, count)
2558 linenr_T lnum;
2559 long count;
2560{
2561 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2562}
2563
2564/*
2565 * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2566 */
2567 void
2568deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2569 linenr_T lnum;
2570 long count;
2571{
2572 mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count);
2573 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2574}
2575
2576/*
2577 * Changed lines for the current buffer.
2578 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2579 * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed()
2580 * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2581 * - invalidate cached values
2582 * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line
2583 * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change).
2584 * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal.
2585 * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*.
2586 */
2587 void
2588changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2589 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */
2590 colnr_T col; /* column in first line with change */
2591 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */
2592 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2593{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002594 changed_lines_buf(curbuf, lnum, lnume, xtra);
2595
2596#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2597 if (xtra == 0 && curwin->w_p_diff)
2598 {
2599 /* When the number of lines doesn't change then mark_adjust() isn't
2600 * called and other diff buffers still need to be marked for
2601 * displaying. */
2602 win_T *wp;
2603 linenr_T wlnum;
2604
2605 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2606 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2607 {
2608 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2609 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2610 if (wlnum > 0)
2611 changed_lines_buf(wp->w_buffer, wlnum,
2612 lnume - lnum + wlnum, 0L);
2613 }
2614 }
2615#endif
2616
2617 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra);
2618}
2619
2620 static void
2621changed_lines_buf(buf, lnum, lnume, xtra)
2622 buf_T *buf;
2623 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */
2624 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */
2625 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2626{
2627 if (buf->b_mod_set)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002628 {
2629 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002630 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2631 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2632 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_bot)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002633 {
2634 /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002635 buf->b_mod_bot += xtra;
2636 if (buf->b_mod_bot < lnum)
2637 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002638 }
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002639 if (lnume + xtra > buf->b_mod_bot)
2640 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2641 buf->b_mod_xlines += xtra;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002642 }
2643 else
2644 {
2645 /* set the area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002646 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2647 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2648 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2649 buf->b_mod_xlines = xtra;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002650 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002651}
2652
2653 static void
2654changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2655 linenr_T lnum;
2656 colnr_T col;
2657 linenr_T lnume;
2658 long xtra;
2659{
2660 win_T *wp;
2661 int i;
2662#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2663 int cols;
2664 pos_T *p;
2665 int add;
2666#endif
2667
2668 /* mark the buffer as modified */
2669 changed();
2670
2671 /* set the '. mark */
2672 if (!cmdmod.keepjumps)
2673 {
2674 curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum;
2675 curbuf->b_last_change.col = col;
2676
2677#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2678 /* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we
2679 * don't have an entry yet. */
2680 if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2681 {
2682 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2683 add = TRUE;
2684 else
2685 {
2686 /* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same
2687 * as the last one and the column is not too far away. Avoids
2688 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */
2689 p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1];
2690 if (p->lnum != lnum)
2691 add = TRUE;
2692 else
2693 {
2694 cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE);
2695 if (cols == 0)
2696 cols = 79;
2697 add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col);
2698 }
2699 }
2700 if (add)
2701 {
2702 /* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes
2703 * and it's at some distance of the last change. Use a new
2704 * position in the changelist. */
2705 curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE;
2706
2707 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE)
2708 {
2709 /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */
2710 curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1;
2711 mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1,
2712 sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1));
2713 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2714 {
2715 /* Correct position in changelist for other windows on
2716 * this buffer. */
2717 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0)
2718 --wp->w_changelistidx;
2719 }
2720 }
2721 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2722 {
2723 /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is
2724 * at the end it stays at the end. */
2725 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf
2726 && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen)
2727 ++wp->w_changelistidx;
2728 }
2729 ++curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2730 }
2731 }
2732 curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] =
2733 curbuf->b_last_change;
2734 /* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g,"
2735 * takes you back to it. */
2736 curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2737#endif
2738 }
2739
2740 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2741 {
2742 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf)
2743 {
2744 /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */
2745 if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID)
2746 wp->w_redr_type = VALID;
2747
2748 /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached
2749 * values for the cursor. */
2750#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2751 /*
2752 * Update the folds for this window. Can't postpone this, because
2753 * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd".
2754 */
2755 foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1);
2756
2757 /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become
2758 * included in a fold. Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that
2759 * might be displayed differently.
2760 * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when
2761 * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */
2762 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL);
2763 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum)
2764 wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2765 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL);
2766 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume)
2767 wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2768
2769 /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines,
2770 * compare with the first line in that range. */
2771 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum)
2772 {
2773 i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum);
2774 if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum)
2775 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2776 }
2777#endif
2778
2779 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum)
2780 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2781 else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col)
2782 changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp);
2783 if (wp->w_botline >= lnum)
2784 {
2785 /* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make
2786 * other lines scroll down below botline). */
2787 approximate_botline_win(wp);
2788 }
2789
2790 /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid.
2791 * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for
2792 * inserted/deleted lines. Makes it possible to stop displaying
2793 * after the change. */
2794 for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i)
2795 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid)
2796 {
2797 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum)
2798 {
2799 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume)
2800 {
2801 /* line included in change */
2802 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2803 }
2804 else if (xtra != 0)
2805 {
2806 /* line below change */
2807 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra;
2808#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2809 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra;
2810#endif
2811 }
2812 }
2813#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2814 else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum)
2815 {
2816 /* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines,
2817 * may need to be redrawn */
2818 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2819 }
2820#endif
2821 }
2822 }
2823 }
2824
2825 /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn,
2826 * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */
2827 if (must_redraw < VALID)
2828 must_redraw = VALID;
2829}
2830
2831/*
2832 * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf'
2833 */
2834 void
2835unchanged(buf, ff)
2836 buf_T *buf;
2837 int ff; /* also reset 'fileformat' */
2838{
2839 if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf)))
2840 {
2841 buf->b_changed = 0;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00002842 ml_setflags(buf);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002843 if (ff)
2844 save_file_ff(buf);
2845#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2846 check_status(buf);
2847#endif
2848#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2849 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */
2850#endif
2851 }
2852 ++buf->b_changedtick;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002853#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2854 netbeans_unmodified(buf);
2855#endif
2856}
2857
2858#if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO)
2859/*
2860 * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf'
2861 * need to be updated
2862 */
2863 void
2864check_status(buf)
2865 buf_T *buf;
2866{
2867 win_T *wp;
2868
2869 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2870 if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height)
2871 {
2872 wp->w_redr_status = TRUE;
2873 if (must_redraw < VALID)
2874 must_redraw = VALID;
2875 }
2876}
2877#endif
2878
2879/*
2880 * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change.
2881 * Don't do this for autocommands.
2882 * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer.
2883 * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but b_did_warn
2884 * will be TRUE.
2885 */
2886 void
2887change_warning(col)
2888 int col; /* column for message; non-zero when in insert
2889 mode and 'showmode' is on */
2890{
2891 if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE
2892 && curbufIsChanged() == 0
2893#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2894 && !autocmd_busy
2895#endif
2896 && curbuf->b_p_ro)
2897 {
2898#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2899 apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf);
2900 if (!curbuf->b_p_ro)
2901 return;
2902#endif
2903 /*
2904 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should
2905 * be after the mode message.
2906 */
2907 msg_start();
2908 if (msg_row == Rows - 1)
2909 msg_col = col;
Bram Moolenaar2df6dcc2004-07-12 15:53:54 +00002910 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002911 MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file"),
2912 hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST);
2913 msg_clr_eos();
2914 (void)msg_end();
2915 if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode)
2916 {
2917 out_flush();
2918 ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */
2919 }
2920 curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE;
2921 redraw_cmdline = FALSE; /* don't redraw and erase the message */
2922 if (msg_row < Rows - 1)
2923 showmode();
2924 }
2925}
2926
2927/*
2928 * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'.
2929 * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid
2930 * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit.
2931 * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters
2932 * from any buffers but directly from the user.
2933 *
2934 * return the 'y' or 'n'
2935 */
2936 int
2937ask_yesno(str, direct)
2938 char_u *str;
2939 int direct;
2940{
2941 int r = ' ';
2942 int save_State = State;
2943
2944 if (exiting) /* put terminal in raw mode for this question */
2945 settmode(TMODE_RAW);
2946 ++no_wait_return;
2947#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
2948 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */
2949#endif
2950 State = CONFIRM; /* mouse behaves like with :confirm */
2951#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2952 setmouse(); /* disables mouse for xterm */
2953#endif
2954 ++no_mapping;
2955 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
2956
2957 while (r != 'y' && r != 'n')
2958 {
2959 /* same highlighting as for wait_return */
2960 smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str);
2961 if (direct)
2962 r = get_keystroke();
2963 else
2964 r = safe_vgetc();
2965 if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC)
2966 r = 'n';
2967 msg_putchar(r); /* show what you typed */
2968 out_flush();
2969 }
2970 --no_wait_return;
2971 State = save_State;
2972#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2973 setmouse();
2974#endif
2975 --no_mapping;
2976 --allow_keys;
2977
2978 return r;
2979}
2980
2981/*
2982 * Get a key stroke directly from the user.
2983 * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left
2984 * button (used at the more prompt).
2985 * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters.
2986 * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored.
2987 * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC.
2988 */
2989 int
2990get_keystroke()
2991{
2992#define CBUFLEN 151
2993 char_u buf[CBUFLEN];
2994 int len = 0;
2995 int n;
2996 int save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c;
2997
2998 mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE; /* mappings are not used here */
2999 for (;;)
3000 {
3001 cursor_on();
3002 out_flush();
3003
3004 /* First time: blocking wait. Second time: wait up to 100ms for a
3005 * terminal code to complete. Leave some room for check_termcode() to
3006 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL). And
3007 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */
3008 n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3,
3009 len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0);
3010 if (n > 0)
3011 {
3012 /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */
3013 n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE);
3014 len += n;
3015 }
3016
3017 /* incomplete termcode: get more characters */
3018 if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0)
3019 continue;
3020 /* found a termcode: adjust length */
3021 if (n > 0)
3022 len = n;
3023 if (len == 0) /* nothing typed yet */
3024 continue;
3025
3026 /* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */
3027 n = buf[0];
3028 if (n == K_SPECIAL)
3029 {
3030 n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]);
3031 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER
3032 || n == K_IGNORE
3033#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3034 || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM
3035 || n == K_LEFTDRAG
3036 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE
3037 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM
3038 || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE
3039 || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG
3040 || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE
3041 || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE
3042 || n == K_RIGHTDRAG
3043 || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE
3044 || n == K_MOUSEDOWN
3045 || n == K_MOUSEUP
3046 || n == K_X1MOUSE
3047 || n == K_X1DRAG
3048 || n == K_X1RELEASE
3049 || n == K_X2MOUSE
3050 || n == K_X2DRAG
3051 || n == K_X2RELEASE
3052# ifdef FEAT_GUI
3053 || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR
3054 || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR
3055# endif
3056#endif
3057 )
3058 {
3059 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER)
3060 mod_mask = buf[2];
3061 len -= 3;
3062 if (len > 0)
3063 mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len);
3064 continue;
3065 }
3066 }
3067#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
3068 if (has_mbyte)
3069 {
3070 if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len)
3071 continue; /* more bytes to get */
3072 buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL;
3073 n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf);
3074 }
3075#endif
3076#ifdef UNIX
3077 if (n == intr_char)
3078 n = ESC;
3079#endif
3080 break;
3081 }
3082
3083 mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c;
3084 return n;
3085}
3086
3087/*
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003088 * Get a number from the user.
3089 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003090 */
3091 int
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003092get_number(colon, mouse_used)
3093 int colon; /* allow colon to abort */
3094 int *mouse_used;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003095{
3096 int n = 0;
3097 int c;
3098
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003099 if (mouse_used != NULL)
3100 *mouse_used = FALSE;
3101
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003102 /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a
3103 * zero (as if CR was hit). */
3104 if (msg_silent != 0)
3105 return 0;
3106
3107#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
3108 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */
3109#endif
3110 ++no_mapping;
3111 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
3112 for (;;)
3113 {
3114 windgoto(msg_row, msg_col);
3115 c = safe_vgetc();
3116 if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c))
3117 {
3118 n = n * 10 + c - '0';
3119 msg_putchar(c);
3120 }
3121 else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H)
3122 {
3123 n /= 10;
3124 MSG_PUTS("\b \b");
3125 }
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003126#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3127 else if (mouse_used != NULL && c == K_LEFTMOUSE)
3128 {
3129 *mouse_used = TRUE;
3130 n = mouse_row + 1;
3131 break;
3132 }
3133#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003134 else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon)
3135 {
3136 stuffcharReadbuff(':');
3137 if (!exmode_active)
3138 cmdline_row = msg_row;
3139 skip_redraw = TRUE; /* skip redraw once */
3140 do_redraw = FALSE;
3141 break;
3142 }
3143 else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC)
3144 break;
3145 }
3146 --no_mapping;
3147 --allow_keys;
3148 return n;
3149}
3150
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003151/*
3152 * Ask the user to enter a number.
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003153 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse and in that case return
3154 * the line number.
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003155 */
3156 int
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003157prompt_for_number(mouse_used)
3158 int *mouse_used;
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003159{
3160 int i;
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003161 int save_cmdline_row;
3162 int save_State;
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003163
3164 /* When using ":silent" assume that <CR> was entered. */
Bram Moolenaar42eeac32005-06-29 22:40:58 +00003165 if (mouse_used != NULL)
3166 MSG_PUTS(_("Type number or click with mouse (<Enter> cancels): "));
3167 else
3168 MSG_PUTS(_("Choice number (<Enter> cancels): "));
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003169
3170 /* Set the state such that text can be selected/copied/pasted. */
3171 save_cmdline_row = cmdline_row;
3172 cmdline_row = Rows - 1;
3173 save_State = State;
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003174 if (mouse_used == NULL)
3175 State = CMDLINE;
3176 else
3177 State = NORMAL;
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003178
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003179 i = get_number(TRUE, mouse_used);
3180 if (KeyTyped)
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003181 {
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003182 /* don't call wait_return() now */
3183 /* msg_putchar('\n'); */
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003184 cmdline_row = msg_row - 1;
3185 need_wait_return = FALSE;
3186 msg_didany = FALSE;
3187 }
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003188 else
3189 cmdline_row = save_cmdline_row;
3190 State = save_State;
3191
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003192 return i;
3193}
3194
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003195 void
3196msgmore(n)
3197 long n;
3198{
3199 long pn;
3200
3201 if (global_busy /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003202 || !messaging()) /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */
3203 return;
3204
Bram Moolenaar7df2d662005-01-25 22:18:08 +00003205 /* We don't want to overwrite another important message, but do overwrite
3206 * a previous "more lines" or "fewer lines" message, so that "5dd" and
3207 * then "put" reports the last action. */
3208 if (keep_msg != NULL && !keep_msg_more)
3209 return;
3210
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003211 if (n > 0)
3212 pn = n;
3213 else
3214 pn = -n;
3215
3216 if (pn > p_report)
3217 {
3218 if (pn == 1)
3219 {
3220 if (n > 0)
3221 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line"));
3222 else
3223 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less"));
3224 }
3225 else
3226 {
3227 if (n > 0)
3228 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn);
3229 else
3230 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn);
3231 }
3232 if (got_int)
3233 STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)"));
3234 if (msg(msg_buf))
3235 {
3236 set_keep_msg(msg_buf);
3237 keep_msg_attr = 0;
Bram Moolenaar7df2d662005-01-25 22:18:08 +00003238 keep_msg_more = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003239 }
3240 }
3241}
3242
3243/*
3244 * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error
3245 */
3246 void
3247beep_flush()
3248{
3249 if (emsg_silent == 0)
3250 {
3251 flush_buffers(FALSE);
3252 vim_beep();
3253 }
3254}
3255
3256/*
3257 * give a warning for an error
3258 */
3259 void
3260vim_beep()
3261{
3262 if (emsg_silent == 0)
3263 {
3264 if (p_vb
3265#ifdef FEAT_GUI
3266 /* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI
3267 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */
3268 && !(gui.in_use && gui.starting)
3269#endif
3270 )
3271 {
3272 out_str(T_VB);
3273 }
3274 else
3275 {
3276#ifdef MSDOS
3277 /*
3278 * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait
3279 * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems
3280 * where the beeps don't overlap.
3281 */
3282 if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10)
3283 {
3284 out_char(BELL);
3285 beep_count = 1;
3286 }
3287 else
3288 ++beep_count;
3289#else
3290 out_char(BELL);
3291#endif
3292 }
Bram Moolenaar5313dcb2005-02-22 08:56:13 +00003293
3294 /* When 'verbose' is set and we are sourcing a script or executing a
3295 * function give the user a hint where the beep comes from. */
3296 if (vim_strchr(p_debug, 'e') != NULL)
3297 {
3298 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
3299 msg_attr((char_u *)_("Beep!"), hl_attr(HLF_W));
3300 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003301 }
3302}
3303
3304/*
3305 * To get the "real" home directory:
3306 * - get value of $HOME
3307 * For Unix:
3308 * - go to that directory
3309 * - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory.
3310 * This also works with mounts and links.
3311 * Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive.
3312 */
3313static char_u *homedir = NULL;
3314
3315 void
3316init_homedir()
3317{
3318 char_u *var;
3319
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003320 /* In case we are called a second time (when 'encoding' changes). */
3321 vim_free(homedir);
3322 homedir = NULL;
3323
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003324#ifdef VMS
3325 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
3326#else
3327 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
3328#endif
3329
3330 if (var != NULL && *var == NUL) /* empty is same as not set */
3331 var = NULL;
3332
3333#ifdef WIN3264
3334 /*
3335 * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another
3336 * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%". Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set
3337 * when $HOME is being set.
3338 */
3339 if (var != NULL && *var == '%')
3340 {
3341 char_u *p;
3342 char_u *exp;
3343
3344 p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%');
3345 if (p != NULL)
3346 {
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003347 vim_strncpy(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003348 exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff);
3349 if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL
3350 && STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL)
3351 {
Bram Moolenaar555b2802005-05-19 21:08:39 +00003352 vim_snprintf((char *)NameBuff, MAXPATHL, "%s%s", exp, p + 1);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003353 var = NameBuff;
3354 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3355 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3356 }
3357 }
3358 }
3359
3360 /*
3361 * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has
3362 * specifically defined it for Vim's sake. However, on Windows NT
3363 * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for
3364 * each user. Try constructing $HOME from these.
3365 */
3366 if (var == NULL)
3367 {
3368 char_u *homedrive, *homepath;
3369
3370 homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE");
3371 homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH");
3372 if (homedrive != NULL && homepath != NULL
3373 && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL)
3374 {
3375 sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath);
3376 if (NameBuff[0] != NUL)
3377 {
3378 var = NameBuff;
3379 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3380 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3381 }
3382 }
3383 }
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003384
3385# if defined(FEAT_MBYTE)
3386 if (enc_utf8 && var != NULL)
3387 {
3388 int len;
3389 char_u *pp;
3390
3391 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are
3392 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3393 acp_to_enc(var, STRLEN(var), &pp, &len);
3394 if (pp != NULL)
3395 {
3396 homedir = pp;
3397 return;
3398 }
3399 }
3400# endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003401#endif
3402
3403#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3404 /*
3405 * Default home dir is C:/
3406 * Best assumption we can make in such a situation.
3407 */
3408 if (var == NULL)
3409 var = "C:/";
3410#endif
3411 if (var != NULL)
3412 {
3413#ifdef UNIX
3414 /*
3415 * Change to the directory and get the actual path. This resolves
3416 * links. Don't do it when we can't return.
3417 */
3418 if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK
3419 && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0)
3420 {
3421 if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK)
3422 var = IObuff;
3423 if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0)
3424 EMSG(_(e_prev_dir));
3425 }
3426#endif
3427 homedir = vim_strsave(var);
3428 }
3429}
3430
Bram Moolenaarf461c8e2005-06-25 23:04:51 +00003431#if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO)
3432 void
3433free_homedir()
3434{
3435 vim_free(homedir);
3436}
3437#endif
3438
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003439/*
3440 * Expand environment variable with path name.
3441 * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME. For Unix "~user/" is expanded.
3442 * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$".
3443 * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src.
3444 */
3445 void
3446expand_env(src, dst, dstlen)
3447 char_u *src; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3448 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
3449 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
3450{
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003451 expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE, NULL);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003452}
3453
3454 void
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003455expand_env_esc(srcp, dst, dstlen, esc, startstr)
3456 char_u *srcp; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003457 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
3458 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
3459 int esc; /* escape spaces in expanded variables */
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003460 char_u *startstr; /* start again after this (can be NULL) */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003461{
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003462 char_u *src;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003463 char_u *tail;
3464 int c;
3465 char_u *var;
3466 int copy_char;
3467 int mustfree; /* var was allocated, need to free it later */
3468 int at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003469 int startstr_len = 0;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003470
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003471 if (startstr != NULL)
3472 startstr_len = STRLEN(startstr);
3473
3474 src = skipwhite(srcp);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003475 --dstlen; /* leave one char space for "\," */
3476 while (*src && dstlen > 0)
3477 {
3478 copy_char = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003479 if ((*src == '$'
3480#ifdef VMS
3481 && at_start
3482#endif
3483 )
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003484#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3485 || *src == '%'
3486#endif
3487 || (*src == '~' && at_start))
3488 {
3489 mustfree = FALSE;
3490
3491 /*
3492 * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may
3493 * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended.
3494 */
3495 if (*src != '~') /* environment var */
3496 {
3497 tail = src + 1;
3498 var = dst;
3499 c = dstlen - 1;
3500
3501#ifdef UNIX
3502 /* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */
3503 if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{'))
3504 {
3505 tail++; /* ignore '{' */
3506 while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}')
3507 *var++ = *tail++;
3508 }
3509 else
3510#endif
3511 {
3512 while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail))
3513#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3514 || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3515#endif
3516 ))
3517 {
3518#ifdef OS2 /* env vars only in uppercase */
3519 *var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail);
3520 tail++; /* toupper() may be a macro! */
3521#else
3522 *var++ = *tail++;
3523#endif
3524 }
3525 }
3526
3527#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3528# ifdef UNIX
3529 if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}')
3530# else
3531 if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3532# endif
3533 var = NULL;
3534 else
3535 {
3536# ifdef UNIX
3537 if (src[1] == '{')
3538# else
3539 if (*src == '%')
3540#endif
3541 ++tail;
3542#endif
3543 *var = NUL;
3544 var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree);
3545#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3546 }
3547#endif
3548 }
3549 /* home directory */
3550 else if ( src[1] == NUL
3551 || vim_ispathsep(src[1])
3552 || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL)
3553 {
3554 var = homedir;
3555 tail = src + 1;
3556 }
3557 else /* user directory */
3558 {
3559#if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME))
3560 /*
3561 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it.
3562 */
3563 tail = src;
3564 var = dst;
3565 c = dstlen - 1;
3566 while ( c-- > 0
3567 && *tail
3568 && vim_isfilec(*tail)
3569 && !vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3570 *var++ = *tail++;
3571 *var = NUL;
3572# ifdef UNIX
3573 /*
3574 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it.
3575 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to
3576 * expand ~user. This is slower and may fail if the shell
3577 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh).
3578 */
3579# if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H)
3580 {
3581 struct passwd *pw;
3582
3583 pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1);
3584 if (pw != NULL)
3585 var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir;
3586 else
3587 var = NULL;
3588 }
3589 if (var == NULL)
3590# endif
3591 {
3592 expand_T xpc;
3593
3594 ExpandInit(&xpc);
3595 xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES;
3596 var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL,
3597 WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE);
3598 ExpandCleanup(&xpc);
3599 mustfree = TRUE;
3600 }
3601
3602# else /* !UNIX, thus VMS */
3603 /*
3604 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of
3605 * directories to search for the user account in.
3606 */
3607 {
3608 char_u test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL];
3609 char_u *path, *next_path, *ptr;
3610 struct stat st;
3611
3612 STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME);
3613 next_path = paths;
3614 while (*next_path)
3615 {
3616 for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ',';
3617 next_path++);
3618 if (*next_path)
3619 *next_path++ = NUL;
3620 STRCPY(test, path);
3621 STRCAT(test, "/");
3622 STRCAT(test, dst + 1);
3623 if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0)
3624 {
3625 var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1);
3626 STRCPY(var, test);
3627 mustfree = TRUE;
3628 break;
3629 }
3630 }
3631 }
3632# endif /* UNIX */
3633#else
3634 /* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */
3635 var = NULL;
3636 tail = (char_u *)""; /* for gcc */
3637#endif /* UNIX || VMS */
3638 }
3639
3640#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
3641 /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes.
3642 * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */
3643 if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL)
3644 {
3645 char_u *p = vim_strsave(var);
3646
3647 if (p != NULL)
3648 {
3649 if (mustfree)
3650 vim_free(var);
3651 var = p;
3652 mustfree = TRUE;
3653 forward_slash(var);
3654 }
3655 }
3656#endif
3657
3658 /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash.
3659 * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */
3660 if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL)
3661 {
3662 char_u *p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t");
3663
3664 if (p != NULL)
3665 {
3666 if (mustfree)
3667 vim_free(var);
3668 var = p;
3669 mustfree = TRUE;
3670 }
3671 }
3672
3673 if (var != NULL && *var != NUL
3674 && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen))
3675 {
3676 STRCPY(dst, var);
3677 dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var);
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003678 c = STRLEN(var);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003679 /* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts
3680 * with it, skip a character */
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003681 if (*var != NUL && after_pathsep(dst, dst + c)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003682#if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA)
3683 && dst[-1] != ':'
3684#endif
3685 && vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3686 ++tail;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003687 dst += c;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003688 src = tail;
3689 copy_char = FALSE;
3690 }
3691 if (mustfree)
3692 vim_free(var);
3693 }
3694
3695 if (copy_char) /* copy at least one char */
3696 {
3697 /*
3698 * Recogize the start of a new name, for '~'.
3699 */
3700 at_start = FALSE;
3701 if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL)
3702 {
3703 *dst++ = *src++;
3704 --dstlen;
3705 }
3706 else if (src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',')
3707 at_start = TRUE;
3708 *dst++ = *src++;
3709 --dstlen;
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003710
3711 if (startstr != NULL && src - startstr_len >= srcp
3712 && STRNCMP(src - startstr_len, startstr, startstr_len) == 0)
3713 at_start = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003714 }
3715 }
3716 *dst = NUL;
3717}
3718
3719/*
3720 * Vim's version of getenv().
3721 * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME.
Bram Moolenaar2f6b0b82005-03-08 22:43:10 +00003722 * Also does ACP to 'enc' conversion for Win32.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003723 */
3724 char_u *
3725vim_getenv(name, mustfree)
3726 char_u *name;
3727 int *mustfree; /* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */
3728{
3729 char_u *p;
3730 char_u *pend;
3731 int vimruntime;
3732
3733#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3734 /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */
3735 if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0)
3736 return homedir;
3737#endif
3738
3739 p = mch_getenv(name);
3740 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */
3741 p = NULL;
3742
3743 if (p != NULL)
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003744 {
3745#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3746 if (enc_utf8)
3747 {
3748 int len;
3749 char_u *pp;
3750
3751 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are
3752 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3753 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3754 if (pp != NULL)
3755 {
3756 p = pp;
3757 *mustfree = TRUE;
3758 }
3759 }
3760#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003761 return p;
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003762 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003763
3764 vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0);
3765 if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0)
3766 return NULL;
3767
3768 /*
3769 * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM.
3770 * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty.
3771 */
3772 if (vimruntime
3773#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3774 && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL
3775#endif
3776 )
3777 {
3778 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3779 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */
3780 p = NULL;
3781 if (p != NULL)
3782 {
3783 p = vim_version_dir(p);
3784 if (p != NULL)
3785 *mustfree = TRUE;
3786 else
3787 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003788
3789#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3790 if (enc_utf8)
3791 {
3792 int len;
3793 char_u *pp;
3794
3795 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions
3796 * are not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII
3797 * characters. */
3798 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3799 if (pp != NULL)
3800 {
3801 if (mustfree)
3802 vim_free(p);
3803 p = pp;
3804 *mustfree = TRUE;
3805 }
3806 }
3807#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003808 }
3809 }
3810
3811 /*
3812 * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using:
3813 * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$')
3814 * - the executable name from argv[0]
3815 */
3816 if (p == NULL)
3817 {
3818 if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL)
3819 p = p_hf;
3820#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3821 /*
3822 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0].
3823 */
3824 else
3825 p = exe_name;
3826#endif
3827 if (p != NULL)
3828 {
3829 /* remove the file name */
3830 pend = gettail(p);
3831
3832 /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */
3833 if (p == p_hf)
3834 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc");
3835
3836#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3837# ifdef MACOS_X
3838 /* remove "build/..." from exe_name, if present */
3839 if (p == exe_name)
3840 {
3841 char_u *pend1;
3842 char_u *pend2;
3843
3844 pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"Contents/MacOS");
3845 pend2 = remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend1, (char_u *)".app");
3846 pend = remove_tail(p, pend2, (char_u *)"build");
3847 /* When runnig from project builder get rid of the
3848 * build/???.app, otherwise keep the ???.app */
3849 if (pend2 == pend)
3850 pend = pend1;
3851 }
3852# endif
3853 /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */
3854 if (p == exe_name)
3855 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src");
3856#endif
3857
3858 /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */
3859 if (!vimruntime)
3860 {
3861 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME);
3862 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT);
3863 }
3864
3865 /* remove trailing path separator */
3866#ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC
3867 /* With MacOS path (with colons) the final colon is required */
3868 /* to avoid confusion between absoulute and relative path */
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003869 if (pend > p && after_pathsep(p, pend))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003870 --pend;
3871#endif
3872
3873 /* check that the result is a directory name */
3874 p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p));
3875
3876 if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p))
3877 {
3878 vim_free(p);
3879 p = NULL;
3880 }
3881 else
3882 {
3883#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3884 /* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */
3885 if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL)
3886 {
3887 vim_free(p);
3888 p = pend;
3889 }
3890#endif
3891 *mustfree = TRUE;
3892 }
3893 }
3894 }
3895
3896#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3897 /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and
3898 * default_vimruntime_dir */
3899 if (p == NULL)
3900 {
3901 /* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */
3902 if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL)
3903 {
3904 p = default_vimruntime_dir;
3905 *mustfree = FALSE;
3906 }
3907 else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL)
3908 {
3909 if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL)
3910 *mustfree = TRUE;
3911 else
3912 {
3913 p = default_vim_dir;
3914 *mustfree = FALSE;
3915 }
3916 }
3917 }
3918#endif
3919
3920 /*
3921 * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast
3922 * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl).
3923 */
3924 if (p != NULL)
3925 {
3926 if (vimruntime)
3927 {
3928 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p);
3929 didset_vimruntime = TRUE;
3930#ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT
3931 {
Bram Moolenaard6754642005-01-17 22:18:45 +00003932 char_u *buf = concat_str(p, (char_u *)"/lang");
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003933
3934 if (buf != NULL)
3935 {
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003936 bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf);
3937 vim_free(buf);
3938 }
3939 }
3940#endif
3941 }
3942 else
3943 {
3944 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p);
3945 didset_vim = TRUE;
3946 }
3947 }
3948 return p;
3949}
3950
3951/*
3952 * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists.
3953 * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise.
3954 */
3955 static char_u *
3956vim_version_dir(vimdir)
3957 char_u *vimdir;
3958{
3959 char_u *p;
3960
3961 if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL)
3962 return NULL;
3963 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE);
3964 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3965 return p;
3966 vim_free(p);
3967 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE);
3968 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3969 return p;
3970 vim_free(p);
3971 return NULL;
3972}
3973
3974/*
3975 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus
3976 * the length of "name/". Otherwise return "pend".
3977 */
3978 static char_u *
3979remove_tail(p, pend, name)
3980 char_u *p;
3981 char_u *pend;
3982 char_u *name;
3983{
3984 int len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1;
3985 char_u *newend = pend - len;
3986
3987 if (newend >= p
3988 && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003989 && (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend)))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003990 return newend;
3991 return pend;
3992}
3993
3994#if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
3995/*
3996 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "???.ext/", return "pend"
3997 * minus the length of "???.ext/". Otherwise return "pend".
3998 */
3999 static char_u *
4000remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend, ext)
4001 char_u *p;
4002 char_u *pend;
4003 char_u *ext;
4004{
4005 int len = (int)STRLEN(ext) + 1;
4006 char_u *newend = pend - len;
4007
4008 if (newend >= p && fnamencmp(newend, ext, len - 1) == 0)
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +00004009 while (newend > p && !after_pathsep(p, newend))
4010 mb_ptr_back(p, newend);
4011 if (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004012 return newend;
4013 return pend;
4014}
4015#endif
4016
4017/*
4018 * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string.
4019 * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed
4020 * again soon.
4021 */
4022 char_u *
4023expand_env_save(src)
4024 char_u *src;
4025{
4026 char_u *p;
4027
4028 p = alloc(MAXPATHL);
4029 if (p != NULL)
4030 expand_env(src, p, MAXPATHL);
4031 return p;
4032}
4033
4034/*
4035 * Our portable version of setenv.
4036 */
4037 void
4038vim_setenv(name, val)
4039 char_u *name;
4040 char_u *val;
4041{
4042#ifdef HAVE_SETENV
4043 mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1);
4044#else
4045 char_u *envbuf;
4046
4047 /*
4048 * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain
4049 * valid. The allocated memory will never be freed.
4050 */
4051 envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2));
4052 if (envbuf != NULL)
4053 {
4054 sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val);
4055 putenv((char *)envbuf);
4056 }
4057#endif
4058}
4059
4060#if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
4061/*
4062 * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name.
4063 */
4064/*ARGSUSED*/
4065 char_u *
4066get_env_name(xp, idx)
4067 expand_T *xp;
4068 int idx;
4069{
4070# if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__)
4071 /*
4072 * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW).
4073 */
4074 return NULL;
4075# else
4076# ifndef __WIN32__
4077 /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */
4078 extern char **environ;
4079# endif
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00004080# define ENVNAMELEN 100
4081 static char_u name[ENVNAMELEN];
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004082 char_u *str;
4083 int n;
4084
4085 str = (char_u *)environ[idx];
4086 if (str == NULL)
4087 return NULL;
4088
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00004089 for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004090 {
4091 if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL)
4092 break;
4093 name[n] = str[n];
4094 }
4095 name[n] = NUL;
4096 return name;
4097# endif
4098}
4099#endif
4100
4101/*
4102 * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in
4103 * 'src'.
4104 * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src.
4105 */
4106 void
4107home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one)
4108 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */
4109 char_u *src; /* input file name */
4110 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
4111 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
4112 int one; /* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include
4113 spaces and commas in the file name. */
4114{
4115 size_t dirlen = 0, envlen = 0;
4116 size_t len;
4117 char_u *homedir_env;
4118 char_u *p;
4119
4120 if (src == NULL)
4121 {
4122 *dst = NUL;
4123 return;
4124 }
4125
4126 /*
4127 * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely.
4128 */
4129 if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help)
4130 {
4131 STRCPY(dst, gettail(src));
4132 return;
4133 }
4134
4135 /*
4136 * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the
4137 * "real" home directory.
4138 */
4139 if (homedir != NULL)
4140 dirlen = STRLEN(homedir);
4141
4142#ifdef VMS
4143 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
4144#else
4145 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
4146#endif
4147
4148 if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL)
4149 homedir_env = NULL;
4150 if (homedir_env != NULL)
4151 envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env);
4152
4153 if (!one)
4154 src = skipwhite(src);
4155 while (*src && dstlen > 0)
4156 {
4157 /*
4158 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name.
4159 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches
4160 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/'
4161 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla",
4162 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up
4163 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user
4164 * er's home directory)).
4165 */
4166 p = homedir;
4167 len = dirlen;
4168 for (;;)
4169 {
4170 if ( len
4171 && fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0
4172 && (vim_ispathsep(src[len])
4173 || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' '))
4174 || src[len] == NUL))
4175 {
4176 src += len;
4177 if (--dstlen > 0)
4178 *dst++ = '~';
4179
4180 /*
4181 * If it's just the home directory, add "/".
4182 */
4183 if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0)
4184 *dst++ = '/';
4185 break;
4186 }
4187 if (p == homedir_env)
4188 break;
4189 p = homedir_env;
4190 len = envlen;
4191 }
4192
4193 /* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */
4194 while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0)
4195 *dst++ = *src++;
4196 /* skip separator */
4197 while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0)
4198 *dst++ = *src++;
4199 }
4200 /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */
4201
4202 *dst = NUL;
4203}
4204
4205/*
4206 * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory.
4207 * When something fails, NULL is returned.
4208 */
4209 char_u *
4210home_replace_save(buf, src)
4211 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */
4212 char_u *src; /* input file name */
4213{
4214 char_u *dst;
4215 unsigned len;
4216
4217 len = 3; /* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */
4218 if (src != NULL) /* just in case */
4219 len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src);
4220 dst = alloc(len);
4221 if (dst != NULL)
4222 home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE);
4223 return dst;
4224}
4225
4226/*
4227 * Compare two file names and return:
4228 * FPC_SAME if they both exist and are the same file.
4229 * FPC_SAMEX if they both don't exist and have the same file name.
4230 * FPC_DIFF if they both exist and are different files.
4231 * FPC_NOTX if they both don't exist.
4232 * FPC_DIFFX if one of them doesn't exist.
4233 * For the first name environment variables are expanded
4234 */
4235 int
4236fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname)
4237 char_u *s1, *s2;
4238 int checkname; /* when both don't exist, check file names */
4239{
4240#ifdef UNIX
4241 char_u exp1[MAXPATHL];
4242 char_u full1[MAXPATHL];
4243 char_u full2[MAXPATHL];
4244 struct stat st1, st2;
4245 int r1, r2;
4246
4247 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4248 r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1);
4249 r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2);
4250 if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0)
4251 {
4252 /* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */
4253 if (checkname)
4254 {
4255 if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4256 return FPC_SAMEX;
4257 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4258 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4259 if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0)
4260 return FPC_SAMEX;
4261 }
4262 return FPC_NOTX;
4263 }
4264 if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0)
4265 return FPC_DIFFX;
4266 if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino)
4267 return FPC_SAME;
4268 return FPC_DIFF;
4269#else
4270 char_u *exp1; /* expanded s1 */
4271 char_u *full1; /* full path of s1 */
4272 char_u *full2; /* full path of s2 */
4273 int retval = FPC_DIFF;
4274 int r1, r2;
4275
4276 /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */
4277 if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL)
4278 {
4279 full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL;
4280 full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL;
4281
4282 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4283 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4284 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4285
4286 /* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */
4287 if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK)
4288 {
4289 if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4290 retval = FPC_SAMEX;
4291 else
4292 retval = FPC_NOTX;
4293 }
4294 else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK)
4295 retval = FPC_DIFFX;
4296 else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2))
4297 retval = FPC_DIFF;
4298 else
4299 retval = FPC_SAME;
4300 vim_free(exp1);
4301 }
4302 return retval;
4303#endif
4304}
4305
4306/*
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004307 * Get the tail of a path: the file name.
4308 * Fail safe: never returns NULL.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004309 */
4310 char_u *
4311gettail(fname)
4312 char_u *fname;
4313{
4314 char_u *p1, *p2;
4315
4316 if (fname == NULL)
4317 return (char_u *)"";
4318 for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; ) /* find last part of path */
4319 {
4320 if (vim_ispathsep(*p2))
4321 p1 = p2 + 1;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004322 mb_ptr_adv(p2);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004323 }
4324 return p1;
4325}
4326
4327/*
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004328 * Get pointer to tail of "fname", including path separators. Putting a NUL
4329 * here leaves the directory name. Takes care of "c:/" and "//".
4330 * Always returns a valid pointer.
4331 */
4332 char_u *
4333gettail_sep(fname)
4334 char_u *fname;
4335{
4336 char_u *p;
4337 char_u *t;
4338
4339 p = get_past_head(fname); /* don't remove the '/' from "c:/file" */
4340 t = gettail(fname);
4341 while (t > p && after_pathsep(fname, t))
4342 --t;
4343#ifdef VMS
4344 /* path separator is part of the path */
4345 ++t;
4346#endif
4347 return t;
4348}
4349
4350/*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004351 * get the next path component (just after the next path separator).
4352 */
4353 char_u *
4354getnextcomp(fname)
4355 char_u *fname;
4356{
4357 while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname))
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004358 mb_ptr_adv(fname);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004359 if (*fname)
4360 ++fname;
4361 return fname;
4362}
4363
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004364/*
4365 * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name.
4366 * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head.
4367 * If there is no head, path is returned.
4368 */
4369 char_u *
4370get_past_head(path)
4371 char_u *path;
4372{
4373 char_u *retval;
4374
4375#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
4376 /* may skip "c:" */
4377 if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':')
4378 retval = path + 2;
4379 else
4380 retval = path;
4381#else
4382# if defined(AMIGA)
4383 /* may skip "label:" */
4384 retval = vim_strchr(path, ':');
4385 if (retval == NULL)
4386 retval = path;
4387# else /* Unix */
4388 retval = path;
4389# endif
4390#endif
4391
4392 while (vim_ispathsep(*retval))
4393 ++retval;
4394
4395 return retval;
4396}
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004397
4398/*
4399 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator.
4400 */
4401 int
4402vim_ispathsep(c)
4403 int c;
4404{
4405#ifdef RISCOS
4406 return (c == '.' || c == ':');
4407#else
4408# ifdef UNIX
4409 return (c == '/'); /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */
4410# else
4411# ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
4412 return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\');
4413# else
4414# ifdef VMS
4415 /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */
4416 return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/'
4417 || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' );
4418# else
4419# ifdef COLON_AS_PATHSEP
4420 return (c == ':');
4421# else /* Amiga */
4422 return (c == ':' || c == '/');
4423# endif
4424# endif /* VMS */
4425# endif
4426# endif
4427#endif /* RISC OS */
4428}
4429
4430#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO)
4431/*
4432 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator.
4433 */
4434 int
4435vim_ispathlistsep(c)
4436 int c;
4437{
4438#ifdef UNIX
4439 return (c == ':');
4440#else
4441 return (c == ';'); /* might not be rigth for every system... */
4442#endif
4443}
4444#endif
4445
4446#if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \
4447 || defined(PROTO)
4448/*
4449 * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally.
4450 */
4451 int
4452vim_fnamecmp(x, y)
4453 char_u *x, *y;
4454{
4455 return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL);
4456}
4457
4458 int
4459vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len)
4460 char_u *x, *y;
4461 size_t len;
4462{
4463 while (len > 0 && *x && *y)
4464 {
4465 if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y)
4466 && !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\')
4467 && !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/'))
4468 break;
4469 ++x;
4470 ++y;
4471 --len;
4472 }
4473 if (len == 0)
4474 return 0;
4475 return (*x - *y);
4476}
4477#endif
4478
4479/*
4480 * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory.
4481 * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is neccesary.
4482 */
4483 char_u *
4484concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep)
4485 char_u *fname1;
4486 char_u *fname2;
4487 int sep;
4488{
4489 char_u *dest;
4490
4491 dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3));
4492 if (dest != NULL)
4493 {
4494 STRCPY(dest, fname1);
4495 if (sep)
4496 add_pathsep(dest);
4497 STRCAT(dest, fname2);
4498 }
4499 return dest;
4500}
4501
Bram Moolenaard6754642005-01-17 22:18:45 +00004502#if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) || defined(PROTO)
4503/*
4504 * Concatenate two strings and return the result in allocated memory.
4505 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4506 */
4507 char_u *
4508concat_str(str1, str2)
4509 char_u *str1;
4510 char_u *str2;
4511{
4512 char_u *dest;
4513 size_t l = STRLEN(str1);
4514
4515 dest = alloc((unsigned)(l + STRLEN(str2) + 1L));
4516 if (dest != NULL)
4517 {
4518 STRCPY(dest, str1);
4519 STRCPY(dest + l, str2);
4520 }
4521 return dest;
4522}
4523#endif
4524
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004525/*
4526 * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path
4527 * separator.
4528 */
4529 void
4530add_pathsep(p)
4531 char_u *p;
4532{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004533 if (*p != NUL && !after_pathsep(p, p + STRLEN(p)))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004534 STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR);
4535}
4536
4537/*
4538 * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name.
4539 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4540 */
4541 char_u *
4542FullName_save(fname, force)
4543 char_u *fname;
4544 int force; /* force expansion, even when it already looks
4545 like a full path name */
4546{
4547 char_u *buf;
4548 char_u *new_fname = NULL;
4549
4550 if (fname == NULL)
4551 return NULL;
4552
4553 buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL);
4554 if (buf != NULL)
4555 {
4556 if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL)
4557 new_fname = vim_strsave(buf);
4558 else
4559 new_fname = vim_strsave(fname);
4560 vim_free(buf);
4561 }
4562 return new_fname;
4563}
4564
4565#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL)
4566
4567static char_u *skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p));
4568
4569/*
4570 * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now.
4571 * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards.
4572 */
4573 pos_T *
4574find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
4575 int ind_maxcomment;
4576{
4577 pos_T *pos;
4578 char_u *line;
4579 char_u *p;
4580
4581 if ((pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, ind_maxcomment)) == NULL)
4582 return NULL;
4583
4584 /*
4585 * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string.
4586 */
4587 line = ml_get(pos->lnum);
4588 for (p = line; *p && (unsigned)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p)
4589 p = skip_string(p);
4590 if ((unsigned)(p - line) > pos->col)
4591 return NULL;
4592 return pos;
4593}
4594
4595/*
4596 * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character.
4597 * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified.
4598 */
4599 static char_u *
4600skip_string(p)
4601 char_u *p;
4602{
4603 int i;
4604
4605 /*
4606 * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time".
4607 */
4608 for ( ; ; ++p)
4609 {
4610 if (p[0] == '\'') /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */
4611 {
4612 if (!p[1]) /* ' at end of line */
4613 break;
4614 i = 2;
4615 if (p[1] == '\\') /* '\n' or '\000' */
4616 {
4617 ++i;
4618 while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1])) /* '\000' */
4619 ++i;
4620 }
4621 if (p[i] == '\'') /* check for trailing ' */
4622 {
4623 p += i;
4624 continue;
4625 }
4626 }
4627 else if (p[0] == '"') /* start of string */
4628 {
4629 for (++p; p[0]; ++p)
4630 {
4631 if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL)
4632 ++p;
4633 else if (p[0] == '"') /* end of string */
4634 break;
4635 }
4636 if (p[0] == '"')
4637 continue;
4638 }
4639 break; /* no string found */
4640 }
4641 if (!*p)
4642 --p; /* backup from NUL */
4643 return p;
4644}
4645#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */
4646
4647#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO)
4648
4649/*
4650 * Do C or expression indenting on the current line.
4651 */
4652 void
4653do_c_expr_indent()
4654{
4655# ifdef FEAT_EVAL
4656 if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL)
4657 fixthisline(get_expr_indent);
4658 else
4659# endif
4660 fixthisline(get_c_indent);
4661}
4662
4663/*
4664 * Functions for C-indenting.
4665 * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer.
4666 */
4667/*
4668 * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line.
4669 */
4670
4671static char_u *cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4672static int cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *));
4673static pos_T *find_line_comment __ARGS((void));
4674static int cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **));
4675static int cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *));
4676static char_u *after_label __ARGS((char_u *l));
4677static int get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4678static int skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment));
4679static int cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void));
4680static int cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4681static int cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *));
4682static int cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump));
4683static int cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4684static int cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4685static int cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int));
4686static int cin_isinit __ARGS((void));
4687static int cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T));
4688static int cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *));
4689static int cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *));
4690static int cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *));
4691static int cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int));
4692static int cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *));
4693static int cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((char_u *line, colnr_T *col));
4694static int cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *));
4695static int cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos));
4696static pos_T *find_start_brace __ARGS((int));
4697static pos_T *find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int));
4698static int corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos));
4699static int find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end));
4700static int find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
4701
4702/*
4703 * Skip over white space and C comments within the line.
4704 */
4705 static char_u *
4706cin_skipcomment(s)
4707 char_u *s;
4708{
4709 while (*s)
4710 {
4711 s = skipwhite(s);
4712 if (*s != '/')
4713 break;
4714 ++s;
4715 if (*s == '/') /* slash-slash comment continues till eol */
4716 {
4717 s += STRLEN(s);
4718 break;
4719 }
4720 if (*s != '*')
4721 break;
4722 for (++s; *s; ++s) /* skip slash-star comment */
4723 if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/')
4724 {
4725 s += 2;
4726 break;
4727 }
4728 }
4729 return s;
4730}
4731
4732/*
4733 * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s. White space and comments are
4734 * not considered code.
4735 */
4736 static int
4737cin_nocode(s)
4738 char_u *s;
4739{
4740 return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL;
4741}
4742
4743/*
4744 * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines.
4745 */
4746 static pos_T *
4747find_line_comment() /* XXX */
4748{
4749 static pos_T pos;
4750 char_u *line;
4751 char_u *p;
4752
4753 pos = curwin->w_cursor;
4754 while (--pos.lnum > 0)
4755 {
4756 line = ml_get(pos.lnum);
4757 p = skipwhite(line);
4758 if (cin_islinecomment(p))
4759 {
4760 pos.col = (int)(p - line);
4761 return &pos;
4762 }
4763 if (*p != NUL)
4764 break;
4765 }
4766 return NULL;
4767}
4768
4769/*
4770 * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true.
4771 */
4772 static int
4773cin_islabel_skip(s)
4774 char_u **s;
4775{
4776 if (!vim_isIDc(**s)) /* need at least one ID character */
4777 return FALSE;
4778
4779 while (vim_isIDc(**s))
4780 (*s)++;
4781
4782 *s = cin_skipcomment(*s);
4783
4784 /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */
4785 return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':');
4786}
4787
4788/*
4789 * Recognize a label: "label:".
4790 * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label.
4791 */
4792 int
4793cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
4794 int ind_maxcomment;
4795{
4796 char_u *s;
4797
4798 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4799
4800 /*
4801 * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented
4802 * like a switch label. Same for C++ scope declarations.
4803 */
4804 if (cin_isdefault(s))
4805 return FALSE;
4806 if (cin_isscopedecl(s))
4807 return FALSE;
4808
4809 if (cin_islabel_skip(&s))
4810 {
4811 /*
4812 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case
4813 * label.
4814 */
4815 pos_T cursor_save;
4816 pos_T *trypos;
4817 char_u *line;
4818
4819 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4820 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
4821 {
4822 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
4823
4824 /*
4825 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
4826 */
4827 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
4828 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
4829 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
4830
4831 line = ml_get_curline();
4832 if (cin_ispreproc(line)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
4833 continue;
4834 if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL)
4835 continue;
4836
4837 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4838 if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE)
4839 || cin_isscopedecl(line)
4840 || cin_iscase(line)
4841 || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line)))
4842 return TRUE;
4843 return FALSE;
4844 }
4845 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4846 return TRUE; /* label at start of file??? */
4847 }
4848 return FALSE;
4849}
4850
4851/*
4852 * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations.
4853 * Q&D-Implementation:
4854 * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line.
4855 */
4856 static int
4857cin_isinit(void)
4858{
4859 char_u *s;
4860
4861 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4862
4863 if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7]))
4864 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7);
4865
4866 if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4867 return TRUE;
4868
4869 if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{"))
4870 return TRUE;
4871
4872 return FALSE;
4873}
4874
4875/*
4876 * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:".
4877 */
4878 int
4879cin_iscase(s)
4880 char_u *s;
4881{
4882 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4883 if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4884 {
4885 for (s += 4; *s; ++s)
4886 {
4887 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4888 if (*s == ':')
4889 {
4890 if (s[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4891 ++s;
4892 else
4893 return TRUE;
4894 }
4895 if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'')
4896 s += 2; /* skip over '.' */
4897 else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/'))
4898 return FALSE; /* stop at comment */
4899 else if (*s == '"')
4900 return FALSE; /* stop at string */
4901 }
4902 return FALSE;
4903 }
4904
4905 if (cin_isdefault(s))
4906 return TRUE;
4907 return FALSE;
4908}
4909
4910/*
4911 * Recognize a "default" switch label.
4912 */
4913 static int
4914cin_isdefault(s)
4915 char_u *s;
4916{
4917 return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0
4918 && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':'
4919 && s[1] != ':');
4920}
4921
4922/*
4923 * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label.
4924 */
4925 int
4926cin_isscopedecl(s)
4927 char_u *s;
4928{
4929 int i;
4930
4931 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4932 if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0)
4933 i = 6;
4934 else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0)
4935 i = 9;
4936 else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0)
4937 i = 7;
4938 else
4939 return FALSE;
4940 return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':');
4941}
4942
4943/*
4944 * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'.
4945 * Return NULL if not found.
4946 * case 234: a = b;
4947 * ^
4948 */
4949 static char_u *
4950after_label(l)
4951 char_u *l;
4952{
4953 for ( ; *l; ++l)
4954 {
4955 if (*l == ':')
4956 {
4957 if (l[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4958 ++l;
4959 else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1))
4960 break;
4961 }
4962 else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'')
4963 l += 2; /* skip over 'x' */
4964 }
4965 if (*l == NUL)
4966 return NULL;
4967 l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1);
4968 if (*l == NUL)
4969 return NULL;
4970 return l;
4971}
4972
4973/*
4974 * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label.
4975 * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label.
4976 */
4977 static int
4978get_indent_nolabel(lnum) /* XXX */
4979 linenr_T lnum;
4980{
4981 char_u *l;
4982 pos_T fp;
4983 colnr_T col;
4984 char_u *p;
4985
4986 l = ml_get(lnum);
4987 p = after_label(l);
4988 if (p == NULL)
4989 return 0;
4990
4991 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l);
4992 fp.lnum = lnum;
4993 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
4994 return (int)col;
4995}
4996
4997/*
4998 * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label.
4999 * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label).
5000 * label: if (asdf && asdfasdf)
5001 * ^
5002 */
5003 static int
5004skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment)
5005 linenr_T lnum;
5006 char_u **pp;
5007 int ind_maxcomment;
5008{
5009 char_u *l;
5010 int amount;
5011 pos_T cursor_save;
5012
5013 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5014 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5015 l = ml_get_curline();
5016 /* XXX */
5017 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
5018 {
5019 amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum);
5020 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
5021 if (l == NULL) /* just in case */
5022 l = ml_get_curline();
5023 }
5024 else
5025 {
5026 amount = get_indent();
5027 l = ml_get_curline();
5028 }
5029 *pp = l;
5030
5031 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5032 return amount;
5033}
5034
5035/*
5036 * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration.
5037 * int a, indent of "a"
5038 * static struct foo b, indent of "b"
5039 * enum bla c, indent of "c"
5040 * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration.
5041 */
5042 static int
5043cin_first_id_amount()
5044{
5045 char_u *line, *p, *s;
5046 int len;
5047 pos_T fp;
5048 colnr_T col;
5049
5050 line = ml_get_curline();
5051 p = skipwhite(line);
5052 len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
5053 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0)
5054 {
5055 p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5056 len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
5057 }
5058 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0)
5059 p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5060 else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0)
5061 p = skipwhite(p + 4);
5062 else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0)
5063 || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0))
5064 {
5065 s = skipwhite(p + len);
5066 if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3]))
5067 || (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))
5068 || (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5]))
5069 || (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])))
5070 p = s;
5071 }
5072 for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len)
5073 ;
5074 if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p))
5075 return 0;
5076
5077 p = skipwhite(p + len);
5078 fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5079 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
5080 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5081 return (int)col;
5082}
5083
5084/*
5085 * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign.
5086 * char *foo = "here";
5087 * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found.
5088 * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash.
5089 * foo = "asdf\
5090 * asdf\
5091 * here";
5092 */
5093 static int
5094cin_get_equal_amount(lnum)
5095 linenr_T lnum;
5096{
5097 char_u *line;
5098 char_u *s;
5099 colnr_T col;
5100 pos_T fp;
5101
5102 if (lnum > 1)
5103 {
5104 line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
5105 if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\')
5106 return -1;
5107 }
5108
5109 line = s = ml_get(lnum);
5110 while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL)
5111 {
5112 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5113 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5114 else
5115 ++s;
5116 }
5117 if (*s != '=')
5118 return 0;
5119
5120 s = skipwhite(s + 1);
5121 if (cin_nocode(s))
5122 return 0;
5123
5124 if (*s == '"') /* nice alignment for continued strings */
5125 ++s;
5126
5127 fp.lnum = lnum;
5128 fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5129 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5130 return (int)col;
5131}
5132
5133/*
5134 * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'.
5135 */
5136 static int
5137cin_ispreproc(s)
5138 char_u *s;
5139{
5140 s = skipwhite(s);
5141 if (*s == '#')
5142 return TRUE;
5143 return FALSE;
5144}
5145
5146/*
5147 * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a
5148 * continuation line of a preprocessor statement. Decrease "*lnump" to the
5149 * start and return the line in "*pp".
5150 */
5151 static int
5152cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump)
5153 char_u **pp;
5154 linenr_T *lnump;
5155{
5156 char_u *line = *pp;
5157 linenr_T lnum = *lnump;
5158 int retval = FALSE;
5159
Bram Moolenaard8e9bb22005-07-09 21:14:46 +00005160 for (;;)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005161 {
5162 if (cin_ispreproc(line))
5163 {
5164 retval = TRUE;
5165 *lnump = lnum;
5166 break;
5167 }
5168 if (lnum == 1)
5169 break;
5170 line = ml_get(--lnum);
5171 if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\')
5172 break;
5173 }
5174
5175 if (lnum != *lnump)
5176 *pp = ml_get(*lnump);
5177 return retval;
5178}
5179
5180/*
5181 * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment.
5182 */
5183 static int
5184cin_iscomment(p)
5185 char_u *p;
5186{
5187 return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/'));
5188}
5189
5190/*
5191 * Recognize the start of a "//" comment.
5192 */
5193 static int
5194cin_islinecomment(p)
5195 char_u *p;
5196{
5197 return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/');
5198}
5199
5200/*
5201 * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'.
5202 * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line.
5203 * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if
5204 * both apply in order to determine initializations).
5205 */
5206 static int
5207cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma)
5208 char_u *s;
5209 int incl_open; /* include '{' at the end as terminator */
5210 int incl_comma; /* recognize a trailing comma */
5211{
5212 char_u found_start = 0;
5213
5214 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5215
5216 if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s)))
5217 found_start = *s;
5218
5219 while (*s)
5220 {
5221 /* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */
5222 s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s));
5223 if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}'
5224 || (incl_comma && *s == ','))
5225 && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5226 return *s;
5227
5228 if (*s)
5229 s++;
5230 }
5231 return found_start;
5232}
5233
5234/*
5235 * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to
5236 * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and
5237 * no semicolons anywhere.
5238 * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line.
5239 * "sp" points to a string with the line. When looking at other lines it must
5240 * be restored to the line. When it's NULL fetch lines here.
5241 * "lnum" is where we start looking.
5242 */
5243 static int
5244cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum)
5245 char_u **sp;
5246 linenr_T first_lnum;
5247{
5248 char_u *s;
5249 linenr_T lnum = first_lnum;
5250 int retval = FALSE;
5251
5252 if (sp == NULL)
5253 s = ml_get(lnum);
5254 else
5255 s = *sp;
5256
5257 while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5258 {
5259 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5260 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5261 else
5262 ++s;
5263 }
5264 if (*s != '(')
5265 return FALSE; /* ';', ' or " before any () or no '(' */
5266
5267 while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5268 {
5269 if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5270 {
5271 /* ')' at the end: may have found a match
5272 * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash:
5273 * #if defined(x) && \
5274 * defined(y)
5275 */
5276 lnum = first_lnum - 1;
5277 s = ml_get(lnum);
5278 if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\')
5279 retval = TRUE;
5280 goto done;
5281 }
5282 if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5283 {
5284 /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */
5285 if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
5286 break;
5287
5288 s = ml_get(++lnum);
5289 }
5290 else if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5291 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5292 else
5293 ++s;
5294 }
5295
5296done:
5297 if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL)
5298 *sp = ml_get(first_lnum);
5299
5300 return retval;
5301}
5302
5303 static int
5304cin_isif(p)
5305 char_u *p;
5306{
5307 return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5308}
5309
5310 static int
5311cin_iselse(p)
5312 char_u *p;
5313{
5314 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} else" */
5315 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5316 return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4]));
5317}
5318
5319 static int
5320cin_isdo(p)
5321 char_u *p;
5322{
5323 return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5324}
5325
5326/*
5327 * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do".
5328 * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the
5329 * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines.
5330 */
5331 static int
5332cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen) /* XXX */
5333 char_u *p;
5334 linenr_T lnum;
5335 int ind_maxparen;
5336{
5337 pos_T cursor_save;
5338 pos_T *trypos;
5339 int retval = FALSE;
5340
5341 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5342 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} while (cond);" */
5343 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5344 if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]))
5345 {
5346 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5347 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5348 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5349 p = ml_get_curline();
5350 while (*p && *p != 'w') /* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */
5351 {
5352 ++p;
5353 ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
5354 }
5355 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL
5356 && *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';')
5357 retval = TRUE;
5358 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5359 }
5360 return retval;
5361}
5362
5363 static int
5364cin_isbreak(p)
5365 char_u *p;
5366{
5367 return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]));
5368}
5369
5370/* Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or
5371 * constructor-initialization. eg:
5372 *
5373 * class MyClass :
5374 * baseClass <-- here
5375 * class MyClass : public baseClass,
5376 * anotherBaseClass <-- here (should probably lineup ??)
5377 * MyClass::MyClass(...) :
5378 * baseClass(...) <-- here (constructor-initialization)
5379 */
5380 static int
5381cin_is_cpp_baseclass(line, col)
5382 char_u *line;
5383 colnr_T *col;
5384{
5385 char_u *s;
5386 int class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class;
5387
5388 *col = 0;
5389
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00005390 s = skipwhite(line);
5391 if (*s == '#') /* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */
5392 return FALSE;
5393 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005394 if (*s == NUL)
5395 return FALSE;
5396
5397 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5398
5399 while(*s != NUL)
5400 {
5401 if (s[0] == ':')
5402 {
5403 if (s[1] == ':')
5404 {
5405 /* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor
5406 * initialization any more */
5407 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5408 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2);
5409 }
5410 else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct)
5411 {
5412 /* we have something found, that looks like the start of
5413 * cpp-base-class-declaration or contructor-initialization */
5414 cpp_base_class = TRUE;
5415 lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5416 *col = 0;
5417 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5418 }
5419 else
5420 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5421 }
5422 else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
5423 || (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6])))
5424 {
5425 class_or_struct = TRUE;
5426 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5427
5428 if (*s == 'c')
5429 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5);
5430 else
5431 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6);
5432 }
5433 else
5434 {
5435 if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';')
5436 {
5437 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5438 }
5439 else if (s[0] == ')')
5440 {
5441 /* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across
5442 * something like "):" */
5443 class_or_struct = FALSE;
5444 lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE;
5445 }
5446 else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0]))
5447 {
5448 /* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */
5449 class_or_struct = FALSE;
5450 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5451 }
5452 else if (*col == 0)
5453 {
5454 /* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */
5455 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5456
5457 /* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */
5458 if (cpp_base_class && *col == 0)
5459 *col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5460 }
5461
5462 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5463 }
5464 }
5465
5466 return cpp_base_class;
5467}
5468
5469/*
5470 * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by
5471 * white space and comments. Skip strings and comments.
5472 * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL.
5473 */
5474 static int
5475cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore)
5476 char_u *s;
5477 char_u *find;
5478 char_u *ignore;
5479{
5480 char_u *p = s;
5481 char_u *r;
5482 int len = (int)STRLEN(find);
5483
5484 while (*p != NUL)
5485 {
5486 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5487 if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0)
5488 {
5489 r = skipwhite(p + len);
5490 if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0)
5491 r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore));
5492 if (cin_nocode(r))
5493 return TRUE;
5494 }
5495 if (*p != NUL)
5496 ++p;
5497 }
5498 return FALSE;
5499}
5500
5501/*
5502 * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos".
5503 * Return the column found.
5504 */
5505 static int
5506cin_skip2pos(trypos)
5507 pos_T *trypos;
5508{
5509 char_u *line;
5510 char_u *p;
5511
5512 p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
5513 while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col)
5514 {
5515 if (cin_iscomment(p))
5516 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5517 else
5518 {
5519 p = skip_string(p);
5520 ++p;
5521 }
5522 }
5523 return (int)(p - line);
5524}
5525
5526/*
5527 * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in.
5528 * Return NULL if no match found.
5529 * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines
5530 * work. */
5531/* foo() */
5532/* { */
5533/* } */
5534
5535 static pos_T *
5536find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
5537 int ind_maxcomment;
5538{
5539 pos_T cursor_save;
5540 pos_T *trypos;
5541 pos_T *pos;
5542 static pos_T pos_copy;
5543
5544 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5545 while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL)
5546 {
5547 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */
5548 trypos = &pos_copy;
5549 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5550 pos = NULL;
5551 /* ignore the { if it's in a // comment */
5552 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col
5553 && (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */
5554 break;
5555 if (pos != NULL)
5556 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
5557 }
5558 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5559 return trypos;
5560}
5561
5562/*
5563 * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment.
5564 * Return NULL of no match found.
5565 */
5566 static pos_T *
5567find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
5568 int ind_maxparen;
5569 int ind_maxcomment;
5570{
5571 pos_T cursor_save;
5572 pos_T *trypos;
5573 static pos_T pos_copy;
5574
5575 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5576 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL)
5577 {
5578 /* check if the ( is in a // comment */
5579 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col)
5580 trypos = NULL;
5581 else
5582 {
5583 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */
5584 trypos = &pos_copy;
5585 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5586 if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */
5587 trypos = NULL;
5588 }
5589 }
5590 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5591 return trypos;
5592}
5593
5594/*
5595 * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the
5596 * cursor position and "startpos". This makes sure that searching for a
5597 * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of
5598 * looking a few lines further.
5599 */
5600 static int
5601corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos)
5602 int ind_maxparen;
5603 pos_T *startpos;
5604{
5605 long n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5606
5607 if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2)
5608 return ind_maxparen - (int)n;
5609 return ind_maxparen;
5610}
5611
5612/*
5613 * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in
5614 * line "l".
5615 */
5616 static int
5617find_last_paren(l, start, end)
5618 char_u *l;
5619 int start, end;
5620{
5621 int i;
5622 int retval = FALSE;
5623 int open_count = 0;
5624
5625 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; /* default is start of line */
5626
5627 for (i = 0; l[i]; i++)
5628 {
5629 i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */
5630 i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in quotes */
5631 if (l[i] == start)
5632 ++open_count;
5633 else if (l[i] == end)
5634 {
5635 if (open_count > 0)
5636 --open_count;
5637 else
5638 {
5639 curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
5640 retval = TRUE;
5641 }
5642 }
5643 }
5644 return retval;
5645}
5646
5647 int
5648get_c_indent()
5649{
5650 /*
5651 * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that
5652 * block should be
5653 */
5654 int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5655
5656 /*
5657 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a
5658 * line is imagined to be.
5659 */
5660 int ind_open_imag = 0;
5661
5662 /*
5663 * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by
5664 * an opening brace.
5665 */
5666 int ind_no_brace = 0;
5667
5668 /*
5669 * column where the first { of a function should be located }
5670 */
5671 int ind_first_open = 0;
5672
5673 /*
5674 * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be
5675 * located
5676 */
5677 int ind_open_extra = 0;
5678
5679 /*
5680 * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left
5681 * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close
5682 * brace should be located
5683 */
5684 int ind_close_extra = 0;
5685
5686 /*
5687 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost
5688 * column is imagined to be
5689 */
5690 int ind_open_left_imag = 0;
5691
5692 /*
5693 * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located
5694 */
5695 int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5696
5697 /*
5698 * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located
5699 */
5700 int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5701
5702 /*
5703 * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label
5704 */
5705 int ind_case_break = 0;
5706
5707 /*
5708 * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label
5709 * should be located
5710 */
5711 int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5712
5713 /*
5714 * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located
5715 */
5716 int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5717
5718 /*
5719 * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented
5720 */
5721 int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5722
5723 /*
5724 * amount a function type spec should be indented
5725 */
5726 int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5727
5728 /*
5729 * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization
5730 * should be indented
5731 */
5732 int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5733
5734 /*
5735 * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line
5736 * should be located
5737 */
5738 int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5739
5740 /*
5741 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses
5742 */
5743 int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2;
5744
5745 /*
5746 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which
5747 * itself is also unclosed
5748 */
5749 int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5750
5751 /*
5752 * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an
5753 * unclosed parentheses.
5754 */
5755 int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0;
5756
5757 /*
5758 * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and
5759 * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer
5760 * context (for very long lines).
5761 */
5762 int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0;
5763
5764 /*
5765 * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after
5766 * an unclosed parentheses.
5767 */
5768 int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0;
5769
5770 /*
5771 * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching
5772 * opening parentheses.
5773 */
5774 int ind_matching_paren = 0;
5775
5776 /*
5777 * Extra indent for comments.
5778 */
5779 int ind_comment = 0;
5780
5781 /*
5782 * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it.
5783 */
5784 int ind_in_comment = 3;
5785
5786 /*
5787 * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something
5788 * after the comment opener.
5789 */
5790 int ind_in_comment2 = 0;
5791
5792 /*
5793 * max lines to search for an open paren
5794 */
5795 int ind_maxparen = 20;
5796
5797 /*
5798 * max lines to search for an open comment
5799 */
5800 int ind_maxcomment = 70;
5801
5802 /*
5803 * handle braces for java code
5804 */
5805 int ind_java = 0;
5806
5807 /*
5808 * handle blocked cases correctly
5809 */
5810 int ind_keep_case_label = 0;
5811
5812 pos_T cur_curpos;
5813 int amount;
5814 int scope_amount;
5815 int cur_amount;
5816 colnr_T col;
5817 char_u *theline;
5818 char_u *linecopy;
5819 pos_T *trypos;
5820 pos_T *tryposBrace = NULL;
5821 pos_T our_paren_pos;
5822 char_u *start;
5823 int start_brace;
5824#define BRACE_IN_COL0 1 /* '{' is in comumn 0 */
5825#define BRACE_AT_START 2 /* '{' is at start of line */
5826#define BRACE_AT_END 3 /* '{' is at end of line */
5827 linenr_T ourscope;
5828 char_u *l;
5829 char_u *look;
5830 char_u terminated;
5831 int lookfor;
5832#define LOOKFOR_INITIAL 0
5833#define LOOKFOR_IF 1
5834#define LOOKFOR_DO 2
5835#define LOOKFOR_CASE 3
5836#define LOOKFOR_ANY 4
5837#define LOOKFOR_TERM 5
5838#define LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6
5839#define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL 7
5840#define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK 8
5841#define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS 9
5842#define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT 10
5843
5844 int whilelevel;
5845 linenr_T lnum;
5846 char_u *options;
5847 int fraction = 0; /* init for GCC */
5848 int divider;
5849 int n;
5850 int iscase;
5851 int lookfor_break;
5852 int cont_amount = 0; /* amount for continuation line */
5853
5854 for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; )
5855 {
5856 l = options++;
5857 if (*options == '-')
5858 ++options;
5859 n = getdigits(&options);
5860 divider = 0;
5861 if (*options == '.') /* ".5s" means a fraction */
5862 {
5863 fraction = atol((char *)++options);
5864 while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options))
5865 {
5866 ++options;
5867 if (divider)
5868 divider *= 10;
5869 else
5870 divider = 10;
5871 }
5872 }
5873 if (*options == 's') /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */
5874 {
5875 if (n == 0 && fraction == 0)
5876 n = curbuf->b_p_sw; /* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */
5877 else
5878 {
5879 n *= curbuf->b_p_sw;
5880 if (divider)
5881 n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider;
5882 }
5883 ++options;
5884 }
5885 if (l[1] == '-')
5886 n = -n;
5887 /* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in
5888 * change.txt, and add explanation for it! */
5889 switch (*l)
5890 {
5891 case '>': ind_level = n; break;
5892 case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break;
5893 case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break;
5894 case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break;
5895 case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break;
5896 case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break;
5897 case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break;
5898 case ':': ind_case = n; break;
5899 case '=': ind_case_code = n; break;
5900 case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break;
5901 case 'p': ind_param = n; break;
5902 case 't': ind_func_type = n; break;
5903 case '/': ind_comment = n; break;
5904 case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break;
5905 case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break;
5906 case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break;
5907 case '+': ind_continuation = n; break;
5908 case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break;
5909 case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break;
5910 case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break;
5911 case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break;
5912 case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break;
5913 case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break;
5914 case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break;
5915 case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break;
5916 case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break;
5917 case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break;
5918 case 'j': ind_java = n; break;
5919 case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break;
5920 }
5921 }
5922
5923 /* remember where the cursor was when we started */
5924 cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor;
5925
5926 /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line.
5927 * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with
5928 * ml_get is valid! */
5929 linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum));
5930 if (linecopy == NULL)
5931 return 0;
5932
5933 /*
5934 * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the
5935 * cursor position. We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when
5936 * inserting new stuff.
5937 * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus
5938 * check for that.
5939 */
5940 if ((State & INSERT)
5941 && curwin->w_cursor.col < STRLEN(linecopy)
5942 && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')')
5943 linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
5944
5945 theline = skipwhite(linecopy);
5946
5947 /* move the cursor to the start of the line */
5948
5949 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5950
5951 /*
5952 * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'.
5953 */
5954 if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE)))
5955 {
5956 amount = 0;
5957 }
5958
5959 /*
5960 * Is it a non-case label? Then that goes at the left margin too.
5961 */
5962 else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) /* XXX */
5963 {
5964 amount = 0;
5965 }
5966
5967 /*
5968 * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a
5969 * previous line, lineup with that one.
5970 */
5971 else if (cin_islinecomment(theline)
5972 && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */
5973 {
5974 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5975 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5976 amount = col;
5977 }
5978
5979 /*
5980 * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the
5981 * comment, try using the 'comments' option.
5982 */
5983 else if (!cin_iscomment(theline)
5984 && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
5985 {
5986 int lead_start_len = 2;
5987 int lead_middle_len = 1;
5988 char_u lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* start-comment string */
5989 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */
5990 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */
5991 char_u *p;
5992 int start_align = 0;
5993 int start_off = 0;
5994 int done = FALSE;
5995
5996 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5997 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5998 amount = col;
5999
6000 p = curbuf->b_p_com;
6001 while (*p != NUL)
6002 {
6003 int align = 0;
6004 int off = 0;
6005 int what = 0;
6006
6007 while (*p != NUL && *p != ':')
6008 {
6009 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
6010 what = *p++;
6011 else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT)
6012 align = *p++;
6013 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
6014 off = getdigits(&p);
6015 else
6016 ++p;
6017 }
6018
6019 if (*p == ':')
6020 ++p;
6021 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
6022 if (what == COM_START)
6023 {
6024 STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end);
6025 lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start);
6026 start_off = off;
6027 start_align = align;
6028 }
6029 else if (what == COM_MIDDLE)
6030 {
6031 STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end);
6032 lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
6033 }
6034 else if (what == COM_END)
6035 {
6036 /* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it
6037 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */
6038 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0
6039 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0)
6040 {
6041 done = TRUE;
6042 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6043 {
6044 /* If the start comment string matches in the previous
6045 * line, use the indent of that line pluss offset. If
6046 * the middle comment string matches in the previous
6047 * line, use the indent of that line. XXX */
6048 look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1));
6049 if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0)
6050 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6051 else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle,
6052 lead_middle_len) == 0)
6053 {
6054 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6055 break;
6056 }
6057 /* If the start comment string doesn't match with the
6058 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */
6059 else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col,
6060 lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0)
6061 continue;
6062 }
6063 if (start_off != 0)
6064 amount += start_off;
6065 else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00006066 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6067 - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006068 break;
6069 }
6070
6071 /* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up
6072 * with the middle comment */
6073 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0
6074 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0)
6075 {
6076 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6077 /* XXX */
6078 if (off != 0)
6079 amount += off;
6080 else if (align == COM_RIGHT)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00006081 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6082 - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006083 done = TRUE;
6084 break;
6085 }
6086 }
6087 }
6088
6089 /* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the
6090 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up
6091 * with the first character of the comment text.
6092 */
6093 if (done)
6094 ;
6095 else if (theline[0] == '*')
6096 amount += 1;
6097 else
6098 {
6099 /*
6100 * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take
6101 * the indent of the previous non-empty line. If 'cino' has "CO"
6102 * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any
6103 * white characters after it line up with the text after it;
6104 * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino'
6105 */
6106 amount = -1;
6107 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum)
6108 {
6109 if (linewhite(lnum)) /* skip blank lines */
6110 continue;
6111 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */
6112 break;
6113 }
6114 if (amount == -1) /* use the comment opener */
6115 {
6116 if (!ind_in_comment2)
6117 {
6118 start = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
6119 look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */
6120 if (*look != NUL) /* if something after it */
6121 trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start);
6122 }
6123 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6124 amount = col;
6125 if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL)
6126 amount += ind_in_comment;
6127 }
6128 }
6129 }
6130
6131 /*
6132 * Are we inside parentheses or braces?
6133 */ /* XXX */
6134 else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6135 && ind_java == 0)
6136 || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6137 || trypos != NULL)
6138 {
6139 if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL)
6140 {
6141 /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found. Use the one which is
6142 * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */
6143 if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum
6144 ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum
6145 : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col)
6146 trypos = NULL;
6147 else
6148 tryposBrace = NULL;
6149 }
6150
6151 if (trypos != NULL)
6152 {
6153 /*
6154 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of
6155 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren.
6156 */
6157 amount = -1;
6158 cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6159 our_paren_pos = *trypos;
6160 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum)
6161 {
6162 l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum));
6163 if (cin_nocode(l)) /* skip comment lines */
6164 continue;
6165 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
6166 continue;
6167 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
6168
6169 /* Skip a comment. XXX */
6170 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6171 {
6172 lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6173 continue;
6174 }
6175
6176 /* XXX */
6177 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(
6178 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6179 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6180 && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
6181 && trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col)
6182 {
6183 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */
6184
6185 if (theline[0] == ')')
6186 {
6187 if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum && cur_amount > amount)
6188 cur_amount = amount;
6189 amount = -1;
6190 }
6191 break;
6192 }
6193 }
6194
6195 /*
6196 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX
6197 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed
6198 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses.
6199 */
6200 if (amount == -1)
6201 {
6202 amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment);
6203 if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0
6204 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6205 {
6206 /*
6207 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there;
6208 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character.
6209 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is
6210 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the
6211 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next
6212 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long
6213 * lines).
6214 */
6215 if (theline[0] != ')')
6216 {
6217 cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6218 l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum);
6219 if (ind_unclosed_wrapped
6220 && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL))
6221 {
6222 /* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level
6223 * for each additional level */
6224 n = 1;
6225 for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col)
6226 {
6227 switch (l[col])
6228 {
6229 case '(':
6230 case '{': ++n;
6231 break;
6232
6233 case ')':
6234 case '}': if (n > 1)
6235 --n;
6236 break;
6237 }
6238 }
6239
6240 our_paren_pos.col = 0;
6241 amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped;
6242 }
6243 else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok)
6244 our_paren_pos.col++;
6245 else
6246 {
6247 col = our_paren_pos.col + 1;
6248 while (vim_iswhite(l[col]))
6249 col++;
6250 if (l[col] != NUL) /* In case of trailing space */
6251 our_paren_pos.col = col;
6252 else
6253 our_paren_pos.col++;
6254 }
6255 }
6256
6257 /*
6258 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it
6259 * if we did the above "if".
6260 */
6261 if (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6262 {
6263 getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6264 if (cur_amount > (int)col)
6265 cur_amount = col;
6266 }
6267 }
6268
6269 if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren)
6270 {
6271 /* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
6272 }
6273 else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore
6274 && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6275 {
6276 if (cur_amount != MAXCOL)
6277 amount = cur_amount;
6278 }
6279 else
6280 {
6281 /* add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one */
6282 col = our_paren_pos.col;
6283 while (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6284 {
6285 --our_paren_pos.col;
6286 switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos))
6287 {
6288 case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2;
6289 col = our_paren_pos.col;
6290 break;
6291 case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2;
6292 col = MAXCOL;
6293 break;
6294 }
6295 }
6296
6297 /* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside
6298 * braces */
6299 if (col == MAXCOL)
6300 amount += ind_unclosed;
6301 else
6302 {
6303 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
6304 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6305 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6306 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6307 amount += ind_unclosed2;
6308 else
6309 amount += ind_unclosed;
6310 }
6311 /*
6312 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two
6313 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous
6314 * lines:
6315 * func_long_name( if (x
6316 * arg && yy
6317 * ) ^ not here ) ^ not here
6318 */
6319 if (cur_amount < amount)
6320 amount = cur_amount;
6321 }
6322 }
6323
6324 /* add extra indent for a comment */
6325 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
6326 amount += ind_comment;
6327 }
6328
6329 /*
6330 * Are we at least inside braces, then?
6331 */
6332 else
6333 {
6334 trypos = tryposBrace;
6335
6336 ourscope = trypos->lnum;
6337 start = ml_get(ourscope);
6338
6339 /*
6340 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general.
6341 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that;
6342 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as
6343 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that.
6344 */
6345 look = skipwhite(start);
6346 if (*look == '{')
6347 {
6348 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6349 amount = col;
6350 if (*start == '{')
6351 start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0;
6352 else
6353 start_brace = BRACE_AT_START;
6354 }
6355 else
6356 {
6357 /*
6358 * that opening brace might have been on a continuation
6359 * line. if so, find the start of the line.
6360 */
6361 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope;
6362
6363 /*
6364 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6365 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6366 */
6367 lnum = ourscope;
6368 if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')')
6369 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6370 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6371 lnum = trypos->lnum;
6372
6373 /*
6374 * It could have been something like
6375 * case 1: if (asdf &&
6376 * ldfd) {
6377 * }
6378 */
6379 if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
6380 amount = get_indent();
6381 else
6382 amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment);
6383
6384 start_brace = BRACE_AT_END;
6385 }
6386
6387 /*
6388 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where
6389 * we want to be. otherwise, add the amount of room
6390 * that an indent is supposed to be.
6391 */
6392 if (theline[0] == '}')
6393 {
6394 /*
6395 * they may want closing braces to line up with something
6396 * other than the open brace. indulge them, if so.
6397 */
6398 amount += ind_close_extra;
6399 }
6400 else
6401 {
6402 /*
6403 * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if"
6404 * to match it with.
6405 * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do"
6406 * to match it with.
6407 */
6408 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6409 if (cin_iselse(theline))
6410 lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF;
6411 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen))
6412 /* XXX */
6413 lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO;
6414 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL)
6415 {
6416 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum;
6417 if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen,
6418 ind_maxcomment) == OK)
6419 {
6420 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
6421 goto theend;
6422 }
6423 }
6424
6425 /*
6426 * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or
6427 * failed to find a matching "if").
6428 * Search backwards for something to line up with.
6429 * First set amount for when we don't find anything.
6430 */
6431
6432 /*
6433 * if the '{' is _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary
6434 * location of a left-margin brace. Otherwise, correct the
6435 * location for ind_open_extra.
6436 */
6437
6438 if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0) /* '{' is in column 0 */
6439 {
6440 amount = ind_open_left_imag;
6441 }
6442 else
6443 {
6444 if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END) /* '{' is at end of line */
6445 amount += ind_open_imag;
6446 else
6447 {
6448 /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */
6449 amount -= ind_open_extra;
6450 if (amount < 0)
6451 amount = 0;
6452 }
6453 }
6454
6455 lookfor_break = FALSE;
6456
6457 if (cin_iscase(theline)) /* it's a switch() label */
6458 {
6459 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE; /* find a previous switch() label */
6460 amount += ind_case;
6461 }
6462 else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline)) /* private:, ... */
6463 {
6464 lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL; /* class decl is this block */
6465 amount += ind_scopedecl;
6466 }
6467 else
6468 {
6469 if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline)) /* break; ... */
6470 lookfor_break = TRUE;
6471
6472 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6473 amount += ind_level; /* ind_level from start of block */
6474 }
6475 scope_amount = amount;
6476 whilelevel = 0;
6477
6478 /*
6479 * Search backwards. If we find something we recognize, line up
6480 * with that.
6481 *
6482 * if we're looking at an open brace, indent
6483 * the usual amount relative to the conditional
6484 * that opens the block.
6485 */
6486 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
6487 for (;;)
6488 {
6489 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
6490 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6491
6492 /*
6493 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line
6494 * up with it.
6495 */
6496 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope)
6497 {
6498 /* we reached end of scope:
6499 * if looking for a enum or structure initialization
6500 * go further back:
6501 * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then
6502 * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable
6503 * declaration:
6504 * int x,
6505 * here; <-- add ind_continuation
6506 */
6507 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6508 {
6509 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0
6510 || curwin->w_cursor.lnum
6511 < ourscope - ind_maxparen)
6512 {
6513 /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit)
6514 * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable
6515 * initialization) */
6516 if (cont_amount > 0)
6517 amount = cont_amount;
6518 else
6519 amount += ind_continuation;
6520 break;
6521 }
6522
6523 l = ml_get_curline();
6524
6525 /*
6526 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the
6527 * comment.
6528 */
6529 trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment);
6530 if (trypos != NULL)
6531 {
6532 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6533 continue;
6534 }
6535
6536 /*
6537 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
6538 */
6539 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6540 continue;
6541
6542 if (cin_nocode(l))
6543 continue;
6544
6545 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6546
6547 /*
6548 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a
6549 * function declaration, we are done
6550 * (it's a variable declaration).
6551 */
6552 if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0
6553 || !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6554 {
6555 /* if the line is terminated with another ','
6556 * it is a continued variable initialization.
6557 * don't add extra indent.
6558 * TODO: does not work, if a function
6559 * declaration is split over multiple lines:
6560 * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then.
6561 */
6562 if (terminated == ',')
6563 break;
6564
6565 /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment,
6566 * we are done.
6567 */
6568 if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit())
6569 break;
6570
6571 /* nothing useful found */
6572 if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{')
6573 continue;
6574 }
6575
6576 if (terminated != ';')
6577 {
6578 /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor
6579 * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it
6580 * will take us back to the start of the line.
6581 */ /* XXX */
6582 trypos = NULL;
6583 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'))
6584 trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6585 ind_maxcomment);
6586
6587 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6588 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6589
6590 if (trypos != NULL)
6591 {
6592 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6593 continue;
6594 }
6595 }
6596
6597 /* it's a variable declaration, add indentation
6598 * like in
6599 * int a,
6600 * b;
6601 */
6602 if (cont_amount > 0)
6603 amount = cont_amount;
6604 else
6605 amount += ind_continuation;
6606 }
6607 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6608 {
6609 if (cont_amount > 0)
6610 amount = cont_amount;
6611 else
6612 amount += ind_continuation;
6613 }
6614 else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6615 && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6616 {
6617 amount = scope_amount;
6618 if (theline[0] == '{')
6619 amount += ind_open_extra;
6620 }
6621 break;
6622 }
6623
6624 /*
6625 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
6626 */ /* XXX */
6627 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6628 {
6629 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6630 continue;
6631 }
6632
6633 l = ml_get_curline();
6634
6635 /*
6636 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that.
6637 * if this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same.
6638 */
6639 iscase = cin_iscase(l);
6640 if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6641 {
6642 /* we are only looking for cpp base class
6643 * declaration/initialization any longer */
6644 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6645 break;
6646
6647 /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in
6648 * labels. */
6649 if (whilelevel > 0)
6650 continue;
6651
6652 /*
6653 * case xx:
6654 * c = 99 + <- this indent plus continuation
6655 *-> here;
6656 */
6657 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6658 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6659 {
6660 if (cont_amount > 0)
6661 amount = cont_amount;
6662 else
6663 amount += ind_continuation;
6664 break;
6665 }
6666
6667 /*
6668 * case xx: <- line up with this case
6669 * x = 333;
6670 * case yy:
6671 */
6672 if ( (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE)
6673 || (iscase && lookfor_break)
6674 || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL))
6675 {
6676 /*
6677 * Check that this case label is not for another
6678 * switch()
6679 */ /* XXX */
6680 if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) ==
6681 NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope)
6682 {
6683 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
6684 break;
6685 }
6686 continue;
6687 }
6688
6689 n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum); /* XXX */
6690
6691 /*
6692 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if
6693 * y = y + 1;
6694 * -> s = 99;
6695 *
6696 * case xx:
6697 * if (cond) <- line up with this line
6698 * y = y + 1;
6699 * -> s = 99;
6700 */
6701 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
6702 {
6703 if (n)
6704 amount = n;
6705
6706 if (!lookfor_break)
6707 break;
6708 }
6709
6710 /*
6711 * case xx: x = x + 1; <- line up with this x
6712 * -> y = y + 1;
6713 *
6714 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if
6715 * -> y = y + 1;
6716 */
6717 if (n)
6718 {
6719 amount = n;
6720 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6721 if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l))
6722 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6723 break;
6724 }
6725
6726 /*
6727 * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch
6728 * label. If nothing is found, line up relative to the
6729 * switch label.
6730 * break; <- may line up with this line
6731 * case xx:
6732 * -> y = 1;
6733 */
6734 scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase /* XXX */
6735 ? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code);
6736 lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY;
6737 continue;
6738 }
6739
6740 /*
6741 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration,
6742 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks.
6743 */
6744 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)
6745 {
6746 if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos =
6747 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6748 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6749 continue;
6750 }
6751
6752 /*
6753 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them.
6754 */
6755 if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
6756 {
6757 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6758 if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l))
6759 continue;
6760 }
6761
6762 /*
6763 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc.
6764 * Ignore comment and empty lines.
6765 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have
6766 * unlocked it)
6767 */
6768 l = ml_get_curline();
6769 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
6770 || cin_nocode(l))
6771 continue;
6772
6773 /*
6774 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
6775 * constructor initialization?
6776 */ /* XXX */
6777 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass
6778 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
6779 {
6780 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6781 {
6782 if (cont_amount > 0)
6783 amount = cont_amount;
6784 else
6785 amount += ind_continuation;
6786 }
6787 else if (col == 0 || theline[0] == '{')
6788 {
6789 amount = get_indent();
6790 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
6791 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6792 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6793 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */
6794 if (theline[0] != '{')
6795 amount += ind_cpp_baseclass;
6796 }
6797 else
6798 {
6799 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6800 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
6801 amount = (int)col;
6802 }
6803 break;
6804 }
6805 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6806 {
6807 /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class
6808 * declaration or initialization before the opening brace. */
6809 if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE))
6810 break;
6811 else
6812 continue;
6813 }
6814
6815 /*
6816 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated.
6817 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if
6818 * there is anoter unterminated statement behind, eg:
6819 * 123,
6820 * sizeof
6821 * here
6822 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure
6823 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration
6824 * (indented).
6825 */
6826 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6827
6828 if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6829 && terminated == ','))
6830 {
6831 /*
6832 * if we're in the middle of a paren thing,
6833 * go back to the line that starts it so
6834 * we can get the right prevailing indent
6835 * if ( foo &&
6836 * bar )
6837 */
6838 /*
6839 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6840 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6841 */
6842 (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
6843 trypos = find_match_paren(
6844 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6845 ind_maxcomment);
6846
6847 /*
6848 * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching
6849 * braces.
6850 */
6851 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6852 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6853
6854 if (trypos != NULL)
6855 {
6856 /*
6857 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is
6858 * handled above.
6859 * case xx: if ( asdf &&
6860 * asdf)
6861 */
6862 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
6863 l = ml_get_curline();
6864 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6865 {
6866 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6867 continue;
6868 }
6869 }
6870
6871 /*
6872 * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the
6873 * indent from
6874 * char *usethis = "bla\
6875 * bla",
6876 * here;
6877 */
6878 if (terminated == ',')
6879 {
6880 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6881 {
6882 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6883 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
6884 break;
6885 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6886 }
6887 }
6888
6889 /*
6890 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
6891 * ignoring any jump label. XXX
6892 */
6893 cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
6894 &l, ind_maxcomment);
6895
6896 /*
6897 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it
6898 * starts with a '{', line it up with this line.
6899 * while (not)
6900 * -> {
6901 * }
6902 */
6903 if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6904 && theline[0] == '{')
6905 {
6906 amount = cur_amount;
6907 /*
6908 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line
6909 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match
6910 * in the same line (scope is the same). Probably:
6911 * { 1, 2 },
6912 * -> { 3, 4 }
6913 */
6914 if (*skipwhite(l) != '{')
6915 amount += ind_open_extra;
6916
6917 if (ind_cpp_baseclass)
6918 {
6919 /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base
6920 * class declaration or initialization */
6921 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
6922 continue;
6923 }
6924 break;
6925 }
6926
6927 /*
6928 * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc.
6929 * Also allow " } else".
6930 */
6931 if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l)))
6932 {
6933 /*
6934 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up
6935 * with the last one.
6936 * if (cond)
6937 * 100 +
6938 * -> here;
6939 */
6940 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6941 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6942 {
6943 if (cont_amount > 0)
6944 amount = cont_amount;
6945 else
6946 amount += ind_continuation;
6947 break;
6948 }
6949
6950 /*
6951 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we
6952 * are finished.
6953 * while (not)
6954 * -> here;
6955 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line
6956 * before this is terminated.
6957 * yyy;
6958 * if (stat)
6959 * while (not)
6960 * xxx;
6961 * -> here;
6962 */
6963 amount = cur_amount;
6964 if (theline[0] == '{')
6965 amount += ind_open_extra;
6966 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
6967 {
6968 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6969 break;
6970 }
6971
6972 /*
6973 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a
6974 * do, line up with the while()
6975 * do
6976 * x = 1;
6977 * -> here
6978 */
6979 l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline());
6980 if (cin_isdo(l))
6981 {
6982 if (whilelevel == 0)
6983 break;
6984 --whilelevel;
6985 }
6986
6987 /*
6988 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the
6989 * one between the "if" and the "else".
6990 * Need to use the scope of this "else". XXX
6991 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
6992 */
6993 if (cin_iselse(l)
6994 && whilelevel == 0
6995 && ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
6996 == NULL
6997 || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
6998 ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL))
6999 break;
7000 }
7001
7002 /*
7003 * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an
7004 * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or
7005 * add someting for a continuation line, depending on
7006 * the line before this one.
7007 */
7008 else
7009 {
7010 /*
7011 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with
7012 * the last one.
7013 * c = 99 +
7014 * 100 +
7015 * -> here;
7016 */
7017 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
7018 {
7019 /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */
7020 if (terminated == ',')
7021 amount += ind_continuation;
7022 break;
7023 }
7024
7025 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7026 {
7027 /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the
7028 * lowest one, but check for cpp base class
7029 * declaration/initialization, if it is an
7030 * opening brace or we are looking just for
7031 * enumerations/initializations. */
7032 if (terminated == ',')
7033 {
7034 if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0)
7035 break;
7036
7037 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
7038 continue;
7039 }
7040
7041 /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but
7042 * reduce indent. */
7043 if (amount > cur_amount)
7044 amount = cur_amount;
7045 }
7046 else
7047 {
7048 /*
7049 * Found first unterminated line on a row, may
7050 * line up with this line, remember its indent
7051 * 100 +
7052 * -> here;
7053 */
7054 amount = cur_amount;
7055
7056 /*
7057 * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we
7058 * are in an initialization or enum
7059 * struct xxx =
7060 * {
7061 * sizeof a,
7062 * 124 };
7063 * or a normal possible continuation line.
7064 * but only, of no other statement has been found
7065 * yet.
7066 */
7067 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',')
7068 {
7069 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT;
7070 cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7071 }
7072 else
7073 {
7074 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL
7075 && *l != NUL
7076 && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7077 /* XXX */
7078 cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(
7079 curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7080 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
7081 lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
7082 }
7083 }
7084 }
7085 }
7086
7087 /*
7088 * Check if we are after a while (cond);
7089 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do".
7090 */
7091 /* XXX */
7092 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(l,
7093 curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7094 {
7095 /*
7096 * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up
7097 * with the last one.
7098 * while (cond);
7099 * 100 + <- line up with this one
7100 * -> here;
7101 */
7102 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7103 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7104 {
7105 if (cont_amount > 0)
7106 amount = cont_amount;
7107 else
7108 amount += ind_continuation;
7109 break;
7110 }
7111
7112 if (whilelevel == 0)
7113 {
7114 lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM;
7115 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7116 if (theline[0] == '{')
7117 amount += ind_open_extra;
7118 }
7119 ++whilelevel;
7120 }
7121
7122 /*
7123 * We are after a "normal" statement.
7124 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the
7125 * indent of that other statement.
7126 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used,
7127 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement.
7128 */
7129 else
7130 {
7131 /*
7132 * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It
7133 * may be lined up with the case label.
7134 */
7135 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK
7136 && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
7137 {
7138 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY;
7139 continue;
7140 }
7141
7142 /*
7143 * Handle "do {" line.
7144 */
7145 if (whilelevel > 0)
7146 {
7147 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7148 if (cin_isdo(l))
7149 {
7150 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7151 --whilelevel;
7152 continue;
7153 }
7154 }
7155
7156 /*
7157 * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add
7158 * the amount for a continuation line.
7159 * x = 1;
7160 * y = foo +
7161 * -> here;
7162 * or
7163 * int x = 1;
7164 * int foo,
7165 * -> here;
7166 */
7167 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7168 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7169 {
7170 if (cont_amount > 0)
7171 amount = cont_amount;
7172 else
7173 amount += ind_continuation;
7174 break;
7175 }
7176
7177 /*
7178 * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if"
7179 * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us.
7180 * x = 1; x = 1;
7181 * if (asdf) y = 2;
7182 * while (asdf) ->here;
7183 * here;
7184 * ->foo;
7185 */
7186 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
7187 {
7188 if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0)
7189 break;
7190 }
7191
7192 /*
7193 * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated.
7194 * To know what needs to be done look further backward for
7195 * a terminated line.
7196 */
7197 else
7198 {
7199 /*
7200 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so
7201 * that matching it will take us back to the start of
7202 * the line. Helps for:
7203 * func(asdr,
7204 * asdfasdf);
7205 * here;
7206 */
7207term_again:
7208 l = ml_get_curline();
7209 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7210 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7211 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7212 {
7213 /*
7214 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is
7215 * handled above.
7216 * case xx: if ( asdf &&
7217 * asdf)
7218 */
7219 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7220 l = ml_get_curline();
7221 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
7222 {
7223 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7224 continue;
7225 }
7226 }
7227
7228 /* When aligning with the case statement, don't align
7229 * with a statement after it.
7230 * case 1: { <-- don't use this { position
7231 * stat;
7232 * }
7233 * case 2:
7234 * stat;
7235 * }
7236 */
7237 iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l));
7238
7239 /*
7240 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
7241 * ignoring any jump label.
7242 */
7243 amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
7244 &l, ind_maxcomment);
7245
7246 if (theline[0] == '{')
7247 amount += ind_open_extra;
7248 /* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */
7249 if (*skipwhite(l) == '{')
7250 amount -= ind_open_extra;
7251 lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM;
7252
7253 /*
7254 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of
7255 * that block.
7256 */
7257 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7258 if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}'
7259 && (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7260 != NULL) /* XXX */
7261 {
7262 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7263 /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */
7264 /* but skip block for "} else {" */
7265 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7266 if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l))
7267 goto term_again;
7268 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7269 }
7270 }
7271 }
7272 }
7273 }
7274 }
7275
7276 /* add extra indent for a comment */
7277 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7278 amount += ind_comment;
7279 }
7280
7281 /*
7282 * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all!
7283 *
7284 * this means we're at the top level, and everything should
7285 * basically just match where the previous line is, except
7286 * for the lines immediately following a function declaration,
7287 * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented.
7288 */
7289 else
7290 {
7291 /*
7292 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any
7293 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start
7294 * of a function
7295 */
7296
7297 if (theline[0] == '{')
7298 {
7299 amount = ind_first_open;
7300 }
7301
7302 /*
7303 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current
7304 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec.
7305 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment
7306 * or if the current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';'.
7307 */
7308 else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count
7309 && !cin_nocode(theline)
7310 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL)
7311 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7312 && cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1)
7313 && !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE))
7314 {
7315 amount = ind_func_type;
7316 }
7317 else
7318 {
7319 amount = 0;
7320 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7321
7322 /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */
7323
7324 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7325 {
7326 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7327 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7328
7329 l = ml_get_curline();
7330
7331 /*
7332 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
7333 */ /* XXX */
7334 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7335 {
7336 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7337 continue;
7338 }
7339
7340 /*
7341 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or constructor
7342 * initialization?
7343 */ /* XXX */
7344 if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{'
7345 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
7346 {
7347 if (col == 0)
7348 {
7349 amount = get_indent() + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */
7350 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7351 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7352 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7353 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum)
7354 + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */
7355 }
7356 else
7357 {
7358 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
7359 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
7360 amount = (int)col;
7361 }
7362 break;
7363 }
7364
7365 /*
7366 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
7367 */
7368 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7369 continue;
7370
7371 if (cin_nocode(l))
7372 continue;
7373
7374 /*
7375 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of
7376 * indentation:
7377 * int foo,
7378 * bar;
7379 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg.
7380 * enum foobar
7381 * {
7382 * ...
7383 * } foo,
7384 * bar;
7385 */
7386 n = 0;
7387 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7388 || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\'))
7389 {
7390 /* take us back to opening paren */
7391 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7392 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7393 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7394 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7395
7396 /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go
7397 * back to the first line with a backslash:
7398 * char *foo = "bla\
7399 * bla",
7400 * here;
7401 */
7402 while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7403 {
7404 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7405 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
7406 break;
7407 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7408 }
7409
7410 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7411
7412 if (amount == 0)
7413 amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7414 if (amount == 0)
7415 amount = ind_continuation;
7416 break;
7417 }
7418
7419 /*
7420 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're
7421 * not in a comment, put it the left margin.
7422 */
7423 if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum)) /* XXX */
7424 break;
7425 l = ml_get_curline();
7426
7427 /*
7428 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function. Put
7429 * current line at the left margin. For when 'cino' has "fs".
7430 */
7431 if (*skipwhite(l) == '}')
7432 break;
7433
7434 /* (matching {)
7435 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by
7436 * comments) align at column 0. For example:
7437 * char *string_array[] = { "foo",
7438 * / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * /
7439 */
7440 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL))
7441 break;
7442
7443 /*
7444 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current
7445 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as
7446 * parameters.
7447 */
7448 if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7449 {
7450 amount = ind_param;
7451 break;
7452 }
7453
7454 /*
7455 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the
7456 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero:
7457 * int foo,
7458 * bar;
7459 * indent_to_0 here;
7460 */
7461 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u*)";", NULL))
7462 {
7463 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7464 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7465 || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\'))
7466 break;
7467 l = ml_get_curline();
7468 }
7469
7470 /*
7471 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just
7472 * use the indent of this line.
7473 *
7474 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
7475 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
7476 */
7477 find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
7478
7479 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7480 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7481 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7482 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7483 break;
7484 }
7485
7486 /* add extra indent for a comment */
7487 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7488 amount += ind_comment;
7489
7490 /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash:
7491 * "asdfasdf\
7492 * here";
7493 * char *foo = "asdf\
7494 * here";
7495 */
7496 if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1)
7497 {
7498 l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7499 if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7500 {
7501 cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7502 if (cur_amount > 0)
7503 amount = cur_amount;
7504 else if (cur_amount == 0)
7505 amount += ind_continuation;
7506 }
7507 }
7508 }
7509 }
7510
7511theend:
7512 /* put the cursor back where it belongs */
7513 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7514
7515 vim_free(linecopy);
7516
7517 if (amount < 0)
7518 return 0;
7519 return amount;
7520}
7521
7522 static int
7523find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
7524 int lookfor;
7525 linenr_T ourscope;
7526 int ind_maxparen;
7527 int ind_maxcomment;
7528{
7529 char_u *look;
7530 pos_T *theirscope;
7531 char_u *mightbeif;
7532 int elselevel;
7533 int whilelevel;
7534
7535 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7536 {
7537 elselevel = 1;
7538 whilelevel = 0;
7539 }
7540 else
7541 {
7542 elselevel = 0;
7543 whilelevel = 1;
7544 }
7545
7546 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7547
7548 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1)
7549 {
7550 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7551 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7552
7553 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7554 if (cin_iselse(look)
7555 || cin_isif(look)
7556 || cin_isdo(look) /* XXX */
7557 || cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7558 {
7559 /*
7560 * if we've gone outside the braces entirely,
7561 * we must be out of scope...
7562 */
7563 theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); /* XXX */
7564 if (theirscope == NULL)
7565 break;
7566
7567 /*
7568 * and if the brace enclosing this is further
7569 * back than the one enclosing the else, we're
7570 * out of luck too.
7571 */
7572 if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope)
7573 break;
7574
7575 /*
7576 * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace,
7577 * then we can ignore it because it's in a
7578 * different scope...
7579 */
7580 if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope)
7581 continue;
7582
7583 /*
7584 * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if")
7585 * then we need to go back to another if, so
7586 * increment elselevel
7587 */
7588 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7589 if (cin_iselse(look))
7590 {
7591 mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4);
7592 if (!cin_isif(mightbeif))
7593 ++elselevel;
7594 continue;
7595 }
7596
7597 /*
7598 * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to
7599 * another "do", so increment whilelevel. XXX
7600 */
7601 if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7602 {
7603 ++whilelevel;
7604 continue;
7605 }
7606
7607 /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */
7608 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7609 if (cin_isif(look))
7610 {
7611 elselevel--;
7612 /*
7613 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that
7614 * get in the way.
7615 */
7616 if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7617 whilelevel = 0;
7618 }
7619
7620 /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */
7621 if (cin_isdo(look))
7622 whilelevel--;
7623
7624 /*
7625 * if we've used up all the elses, then
7626 * this must be the if that we want!
7627 * match the indent level of that if.
7628 */
7629 if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0)
7630 {
7631 return OK;
7632 }
7633 }
7634 }
7635 return FAIL;
7636}
7637
7638# if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
7639/*
7640 * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'.
7641 */
7642 int
7643get_expr_indent()
7644{
7645 int indent;
7646 pos_T pos;
7647 int save_State;
7648
7649 pos = curwin->w_cursor;
7650 set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7651 ++sandbox;
7652 indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde);
7653 --sandbox;
7654
7655 /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to.
7656 * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o"
7657 * command. */
7658 save_State = State;
7659 State = INSERT;
7660 curwin->w_cursor = pos;
7661 check_cursor();
7662 State = save_State;
7663
7664 /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */
7665 if (indent < 0)
7666 indent = get_indent();
7667
7668 return indent;
7669}
7670# endif
7671
7672#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */
7673
7674#if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO)
7675
7676static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p));
7677
7678 static int
7679lisp_match(p)
7680 char_u *p;
7681{
7682 char_u buf[LSIZE];
7683 int len;
7684 char_u *word = p_lispwords;
7685
7686 while (*word != NUL)
7687 {
7688 (void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ",");
7689 len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
7690 if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ')
7691 return TRUE;
7692 }
7693 return FALSE;
7694}
7695
7696/*
7697 * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used.
7698 * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting
7699 * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still
7700 * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, dirk@rave.org
7701 *
7702 * TODO:
7703 * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch
7704 * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented:
7705 * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals
7706 * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon
7707 * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal
7708 * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases.
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007709 * Update from Sergey Khorev:
7710 * I tried to fix the first two issues.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007711 */
7712 int
7713get_lisp_indent()
7714{
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007715 pos_T *pos, realpos, paren;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007716 int amount;
7717 char_u *that;
7718 colnr_T col;
7719 colnr_T firsttry;
7720 int parencount, quotecount;
7721 int vi_lisp;
7722
7723 /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */
7724 vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL);
7725
7726 realpos = curwin->w_cursor;
7727 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7728
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007729 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL)
7730 pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7731 else
7732 {
7733 paren = *pos;
7734 pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7735 if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren))
7736 pos = &paren;
7737 }
7738 if (pos != NULL)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007739 {
7740 /* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white
7741 * line that is at the same () level. */
7742 amount = -1;
7743 parencount = 0;
7744
7745 while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum)
7746 {
7747 if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7748 continue;
7749 for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that)
7750 {
7751 if (*that == ';')
7752 {
7753 while (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7754 ++that;
7755 continue;
7756 }
7757 if (*that == '\\')
7758 {
7759 if (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7760 ++that;
7761 continue;
7762 }
7763 if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL)
7764 {
7765 that++;
7766 while (*that && (*that != '"' || *(that - 1) == '\\'))
7767 ++that;
7768 }
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007769 if (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007770 ++parencount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007771 else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007772 --parencount;
7773 }
7774 if (parencount == 0)
7775 {
7776 amount = get_indent();
7777 break;
7778 }
7779 }
7780
7781 if (amount == -1)
7782 {
7783 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
7784 curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col;
7785 col = pos->col;
7786
7787 that = ml_get_curline();
7788
7789 if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0)
7790 amount = 2;
7791 else
7792 {
7793 amount = 0;
7794 while (*that && col)
7795 {
7796 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount);
7797 col--;
7798 }
7799
7800 /*
7801 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the
7802 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms):
7803 *
7804 * (let ((a 1)) instead (let ((a 1))
7805 * (...)) of (...))
7806 */
7807
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007808 if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7809 && lisp_match(that + 1))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007810 amount += 2;
7811 else
7812 {
7813 that++;
7814 amount++;
7815 firsttry = amount;
7816
7817 while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7818 {
7819 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7820 ++that;
7821 }
7822
7823 if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */
7824 {
7825 /* test *that != '(' to accomodate first let/do
7826 * argument if it is more than one line */
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007827 if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007828 firsttry++;
7829
7830 parencount = 0;
7831 quotecount = 0;
7832
7833 if (vi_lisp
7834 || (*that != '"'
7835 && *that != '\''
7836 && *that != '#'
7837 && (*that < '0' || *that > '9')))
7838 {
7839 while (*that
7840 && (!vim_iswhite(*that)
7841 || quotecount
7842 || parencount)
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007843 && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007844 && !quotecount
7845 && !parencount
7846 && vi_lisp)))
7847 {
7848 if (*that == '"')
7849 quotecount = !quotecount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007850 if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7851 && !quotecount)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007852 ++parencount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007853 if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']')
7854 && !quotecount)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007855 --parencount;
7856 if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL)
7857 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7858 (colnr_T)amount);
7859 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7860 (colnr_T)amount);
7861 }
7862 }
7863 while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7864 {
7865 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7866 that++;
7867 }
7868 if (!*that || *that == ';')
7869 amount = firsttry;
7870 }
7871 }
7872 }
7873 }
7874 }
7875 else
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007876 amount = 0; /* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007877
7878 curwin->w_cursor = realpos;
7879
7880 return amount;
7881}
7882#endif /* FEAT_LISP */
7883
7884 void
7885prepare_to_exit()
7886{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00007887#if defined(SIGHUP) && defined(SIG_IGN)
7888 /* Ignore SIGHUP, because a dropped connection causes a read error, which
7889 * makes Vim exit and then handling SIGHUP causes various reentrance
7890 * problems. */
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00007891 signal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN);
7892#endif
7893
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007894#ifdef FEAT_GUI
7895 if (gui.in_use)
7896 {
7897 gui.dying = TRUE;
7898 out_trash(); /* trash any pending output */
7899 }
7900 else
7901#endif
7902 {
7903 windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0);
7904
7905 /*
7906 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal"
7907 * screen (if there are two screens).
7908 */
7909 settmode(TMODE_COOK);
7910#ifdef WIN3264
7911 if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE)
7912#endif
7913 stoptermcap();
7914 out_flush();
7915 }
7916}
7917
7918/*
7919 * Preserve files and exit.
7920 * When called IObuff must contain a message.
7921 */
7922 void
7923preserve_exit()
7924{
7925 buf_T *buf;
7926
7927 prepare_to_exit();
7928
7929 out_str(IObuff);
7930 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */
7931 out_flush();
7932
7933 ml_close_notmod(); /* close all not-modified buffers */
7934
7935 for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next)
7936 {
7937 if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL)
7938 {
7939 OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n"));
7940 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */
7941 out_flush();
7942 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */
7943 break;
7944 }
7945 }
7946
7947 ml_close_all(FALSE); /* close all memfiles, without deleting */
7948
7949 OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n"));
7950
7951 getout(1);
7952}
7953
7954/*
7955 * return TRUE if "fname" exists.
7956 */
7957 int
7958vim_fexists(fname)
7959 char_u *fname;
7960{
7961 struct stat st;
7962
7963 if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st))
7964 return FALSE;
7965 return TRUE;
7966}
7967
7968/*
7969 * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while.
7970 * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for
7971 * each line in the file. Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much
7972 * time, because it can be a system call.
7973 */
7974
7975#ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP
7976# ifdef FEAT_GUI /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */
7977# define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200
7978# else
7979# define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32
7980# endif
7981#endif
7982
7983static int breakcheck_count = 0;
7984
7985 void
7986line_breakcheck()
7987{
7988 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP)
7989 {
7990 breakcheck_count = 0;
7991 ui_breakcheck();
7992 }
7993}
7994
7995/*
7996 * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often.
7997 */
7998 void
7999fast_breakcheck()
8000{
8001 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10)
8002 {
8003 breakcheck_count = 0;
8004 ui_breakcheck();
8005 }
8006}
8007
8008/*
8009 * Expand wildcards. Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching
8010 * 'wildignore'.
8011 */
8012 int
8013expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8014 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */
8015 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */
8016 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */
8017 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */
8018 int flags; /* EW_DIR, etc. */
8019{
8020 int retval;
8021 int i, j;
8022 char_u *p;
8023 int non_suf_match; /* number without matching suffix */
8024
8025 retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8026
8027 /* When keeping all matches, return here */
8028 if (flags & EW_KEEPALL)
8029 return retval;
8030
8031#ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN
8032 /*
8033 * Remove names that match 'wildignore'.
8034 */
8035 if (*p_wig)
8036 {
8037 char_u *ffname;
8038
8039 /* check all files in (*file)[] */
8040 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8041 {
8042 ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE);
8043 if (ffname == NULL) /* out of memory */
8044 break;
8045# ifdef VMS
8046 vms_remove_version(ffname);
8047# endif
8048 if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname))
8049 {
8050 /* remove this matching file from the list */
8051 vim_free((*file)[i]);
8052 for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j)
8053 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1];
8054 --*num_file;
8055 --i;
8056 }
8057 vim_free(ffname);
8058 }
8059 }
8060#endif
8061
8062 /*
8063 * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end.
8064 */
8065 if (*num_file > 1)
8066 {
8067 non_suf_match = 0;
8068 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8069 {
8070 if (!match_suffix((*file)[i]))
8071 {
8072 /*
8073 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front
8074 * of the list.
8075 */
8076 p = (*file)[i];
8077 for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j)
8078 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1];
8079 (*file)[non_suf_match++] = p;
8080 }
8081 }
8082 }
8083
8084 return retval;
8085}
8086
8087/*
8088 * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'.
8089 */
8090 int
8091match_suffix(fname)
8092 char_u *fname;
8093{
8094 int fnamelen, setsuflen;
8095 char_u *setsuf;
8096#define MAXSUFLEN 30 /* maximum length of a file suffix */
8097 char_u suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN];
8098
8099 fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname);
8100 setsuflen = 0;
8101 for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; )
8102 {
8103 setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,");
8104 if (fnamelen >= setsuflen
8105 && fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen,
8106 (size_t)setsuflen) == 0)
8107 break;
8108 setsuflen = 0;
8109 }
8110 return (setsuflen != 0);
8111}
8112
8113#if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO)
8114
8115# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8116static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p));
8117static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags));
8118# endif
8119
8120# if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264)
8121/*
8122 * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32. It's here because
8123 * it's shared between these systems.
8124 */
8125# if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO)
8126# define _cdecl /* DJGPP doesn't have this */
8127# else
8128# ifdef __BORLANDC__
8129# define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF
8130# endif
8131# endif
8132
8133/*
8134 * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath()
8135 */
8136 static int _cdecl
8137pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b)
8138{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00008139 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008140}
8141
8142# ifndef WIN3264
8143 static void
8144namelowcpy(
8145 char_u *d,
8146 char_u *s)
8147{
8148# ifdef DJGPP
8149 if (USE_LONG_FNAME) /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */
8150 while (*s)
8151 *d++ = *s++;
8152 else
8153# endif
8154 while (*s)
8155 *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++);
8156 *d = NUL;
8157}
8158# endif
8159
8160/*
8161 * Recursively build up a list of files in "gap" matching the first wildcard
8162 * in `path'. Called by expand_wildcards().
8163 * Return the number of matches found.
8164 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
8165 * at "path[wildoff]".
8166 */
8167 static int
8168dos_expandpath(
8169 garray_T *gap,
8170 char_u *path,
8171 int wildoff,
8172 int flags) /* EW_* flags */
8173{
8174 char_u *buf;
8175 char_u *path_end;
8176 char_u *p, *s, *e;
8177 int start_len = gap->ga_len;
8178 int ok;
8179#ifdef WIN3264
8180 WIN32_FIND_DATA fb;
8181 HANDLE hFind = (HANDLE)0;
8182# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8183 WIN32_FIND_DATAW wfb;
8184 WCHAR *wn = NULL; /* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */
8185# endif
8186#else
8187 struct ffblk fb;
8188#endif
8189 int matches;
8190 int starts_with_dot;
8191 int len;
8192 char_u *pat;
8193 regmatch_T regmatch;
8194 char_u *matchname;
8195
8196 /* make room for file name */
8197 buf = alloc((unsigned int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
8198 if (buf == NULL)
8199 return 0;
8200
8201 /*
8202 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1.
8203 * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters.
8204 */
8205 p = buf;
8206 s = buf;
8207 e = NULL;
8208 path_end = path;
8209 while (*path_end != NUL)
8210 {
8211 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
8212 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
8213 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
8214 *p++ = *path_end++;
8215 else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/')
8216 {
8217 if (e != NULL)
8218 break;
8219 s = p + 1;
8220 }
8221 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
8222 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL)
8223 e = p;
8224#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8225 if (has_mbyte)
8226 {
8227 len = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(path_end);
8228 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
8229 p += len;
8230 path_end += len;
8231 }
8232 else
8233#endif
8234 *p++ = *path_end++;
8235 }
8236 e = p;
8237 *e = NUL;
8238
8239 /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */
8240 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
8241 * component. */
8242 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8243 if (rem_backslash(p))
8244 {
8245 STRCPY(p, p + 1);
8246 --e;
8247 --s;
8248 }
8249
8250 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8251 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8252 if (pat == NULL)
8253 {
8254 vim_free(buf);
8255 return 0;
8256 }
8257
8258 /* compile the regexp into a program */
8259 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Always ignore case */
8260 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8261 vim_free(pat);
8262
8263 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8264 {
8265 vim_free(buf);
8266 return 0;
8267 }
8268
8269 /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */
8270 matchname = vim_strsave(s);
8271
8272 /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */
8273 STRCPY(s, "*.*");
8274#ifdef WIN3264
8275# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8276 if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage)
8277 {
8278 /* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'. Attempt using the
8279 * wide function. If it fails because it is not implemented fall back
8280 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */
8281 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8282 if (wn != NULL)
8283 {
8284 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8285 if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE
8286 && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED)
8287 {
8288 vim_free(wn);
8289 wn = NULL;
8290 }
8291 }
8292 }
8293
8294 if (wn == NULL)
8295# endif
8296 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8297 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8298#else
8299 /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */
8300 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8301 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8302#endif
8303
8304 while (ok)
8305 {
8306#ifdef WIN3264
8307# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8308 if (wn != NULL)
8309 p = ucs2_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL); /* p is allocated here */
8310 else
8311# endif
8312 p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName;
8313#else
8314 p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name;
8315#endif
8316 /* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for. Accept
8317 * all entries found with "matchname". */
8318 if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8319 && (matchname == NULL
8320 || vim_regexec(&regmatch, p, (colnr_T)0)))
8321 {
8322#ifdef WIN3264
8323 STRCPY(s, p);
8324#else
8325 namelowcpy(s, p);
8326#endif
8327 len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
8328 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8329 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end))
8330 {
8331 /* need to expand another component of the path */
8332 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8333 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags);
8334 }
8335 else
8336 {
8337 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8338 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8339 if (*path_end != 0)
8340 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8341 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */
8342 addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8343 }
8344 }
8345
8346#ifdef WIN3264
8347# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8348 if (wn != NULL)
8349 {
8350 vim_free(p);
8351 ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb);
8352 }
8353 else
8354# endif
8355 ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb);
8356#else
8357 ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0);
8358#endif
8359
8360 /* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name
8361 * itself. Finds the long name of a short filename. */
8362 if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len)
8363 {
8364 STRCPY(s, matchname);
8365#ifdef WIN3264
8366 FindClose(hFind);
8367# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8368 if (wn != NULL)
8369 {
8370 vim_free(wn);
8371 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8372 if (wn != NULL)
8373 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8374 }
8375 if (wn == NULL)
8376# endif
8377 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8378 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8379#else
8380 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8381 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8382#endif
8383 vim_free(matchname);
8384 matchname = NULL;
8385 }
8386 }
8387
8388#ifdef WIN3264
8389 FindClose(hFind);
8390# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8391 vim_free(wn);
8392# endif
8393#endif
8394 vim_free(buf);
8395 vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
8396 vim_free(matchname);
8397
8398 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
8399 if (matches > 0)
8400 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches,
8401 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
8402 return matches;
8403}
8404
8405 int
8406mch_expandpath(
8407 garray_T *gap,
8408 char_u *path,
8409 int flags) /* EW_* flags */
8410{
8411 return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags);
8412}
8413# endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */
8414
8415/*
8416 * Generic wildcard expansion code.
8417 *
8418 * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a
8419 * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*"
8420 *
8421 * Return FAIL when no single file was found. In this case "num_file" is not
8422 * set, and "file" may contain an error message.
8423 * Return OK when some files found. "num_file" is set to the number of
8424 * matches, "file" to the array of matches. Call FreeWild() later.
8425 */
8426 int
8427gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8428 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */
8429 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */
8430 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */
8431 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */
8432 int flags; /* EW_* flags */
8433{
8434 int i;
8435 garray_T ga;
8436 char_u *p;
8437 static int recursive = FALSE;
8438 int add_pat;
8439
8440 /*
8441 * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user". If this fails,
8442 * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here. In this case, always
8443 * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible. Otherwise,
8444 * return FAIL.
8445 */
8446 if (recursive)
8447#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8448 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8449#else
8450 return FAIL;
8451#endif
8452
8453#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8454 /*
8455 * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle
8456 * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion. This
8457 * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately.
8458 * For `=expr` do use the internal function.
8459 */
8460 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++)
8461 {
8462 if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL
8463# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8464 && !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=')
8465# endif
8466 )
8467 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8468 }
8469#endif
8470
8471 recursive = TRUE;
8472
8473 /*
8474 * The matching file names are stored in a growarray. Init it empty.
8475 */
8476 ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30);
8477
8478 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i)
8479 {
8480 add_pat = -1;
8481 p = pat[i];
8482
8483#ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8484 if (vim_backtick(p))
8485 add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags);
8486 else
8487#endif
8488 {
8489 /*
8490 * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/".
8491 */
8492 if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8493 {
8494 p = expand_env_save(p);
8495 if (p == NULL)
8496 p = pat[i];
8497#ifdef UNIX
8498 /*
8499 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment
8500 * variable, use the shell to do that. Discard previously
8501 * found file names and start all over again.
8502 */
8503 else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8504 {
8505 vim_free(p);
8506 ga_clear(&ga);
8507 i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file,
8508 flags);
8509 recursive = FALSE;
8510 return i;
8511 }
8512#endif
8513 }
8514
8515 /*
8516 * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to
8517 * the list. If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add
8518 * the pattern.
8519 * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or
8520 * when EW_NOTFOUND is given.
8521 */
8522 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p))
8523 add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags);
8524 }
8525
8526 if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)))
8527 {
8528 char_u *t = backslash_halve_save(p);
8529
8530#if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC)
8531 slash_to_colon(t);
8532#endif
8533 /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs. Makes
8534 * "vim c:/" work. */
8535 if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)
8536 addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE);
8537 else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0)
8538 addfile(&ga, t, flags);
8539 vim_free(t);
8540 }
8541
8542 if (p != pat[i])
8543 vim_free(p);
8544 }
8545
8546 *num_file = ga.ga_len;
8547 *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)"";
8548
8549 recursive = FALSE;
8550
8551 return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL;
8552}
8553
8554# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8555
8556/*
8557 * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here.
8558 */
8559 static int
8560vim_backtick(p)
8561 char_u *p;
8562{
8563 return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`');
8564}
8565
8566/*
8567 * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command.
8568 * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `.
8569 * Returns number of file names found.
8570 */
8571 static int
8572expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags)
8573 garray_T *gap;
8574 char_u *pat;
8575 int flags; /* EW_* flags */
8576{
8577 char_u *p;
8578 char_u *cmd;
8579 char_u *buffer;
8580 int cnt = 0;
8581 int i;
8582
8583 /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */
8584 cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2);
8585 if (cmd == NULL)
8586 return 0;
8587
8588#ifdef FEAT_EVAL
8589 if (*cmd == '=') /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */
8590 buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p);
8591 else
8592#endif
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008593 buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL,
8594 (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008595 vim_free(cmd);
8596 if (buffer == NULL)
8597 return 0;
8598
8599 cmd = buffer;
8600 while (*cmd != NUL)
8601 {
8602 cmd = skipwhite(cmd); /* skip over white space */
8603 p = cmd;
8604 while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */
8605 ++p;
8606 /* add an entry if it is not empty */
8607 if (p > cmd)
8608 {
8609 i = *p;
8610 *p = NUL;
8611 addfile(gap, cmd, flags);
8612 *p = i;
8613 ++cnt;
8614 }
8615 cmd = p;
8616 while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n'))
8617 ++cmd;
8618 }
8619
8620 vim_free(buffer);
8621 return cnt;
8622}
8623# endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */
8624
8625/*
8626 * Add a file to a file list. Accepted flags:
8627 * EW_DIR add directories
8628 * EW_FILE add files
8629 * EW_NOTFOUND add even when it doesn't exist
8630 * EW_ADDSLASH add slash after directory name
8631 */
8632 void
8633addfile(gap, f, flags)
8634 garray_T *gap;
8635 char_u *f; /* filename */
8636 int flags;
8637{
8638 char_u *p;
8639 int isdir;
8640
8641 /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */
8642 if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0)
8643 return;
8644
8645#ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL
8646 /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */
8647 if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL)
8648 return;
8649#endif
8650
8651 isdir = mch_isdir(f);
8652 if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE)))
8653 return;
8654
8655 /* Make room for another item in the file list. */
8656 if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL)
8657 return;
8658
8659 p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir));
8660 if (p == NULL)
8661 return;
8662
8663 STRCPY(p, f);
8664#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
8665 slash_adjust(p);
8666#endif
8667 /*
8668 * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present.
8669 */
8670#ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR
8671 if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH))
8672 add_pathsep(p);
8673#endif
8674 ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008675}
8676#endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */
8677
8678#if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
8679
8680#ifndef SEEK_SET
8681# define SEEK_SET 0
8682#endif
8683#ifndef SEEK_END
8684# define SEEK_END 2
8685#endif
8686
8687/*
8688 * Get the stdout of an external command.
8689 * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error.
8690 */
8691 char_u *
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008692get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008693 char_u *cmd;
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008694 char_u *infile; /* optional input file name */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008695 int flags; /* can be SHELL_SILENT */
8696{
8697 char_u *tempname;
8698 char_u *command;
8699 char_u *buffer = NULL;
8700 int len;
8701 int i = 0;
8702 FILE *fd;
8703
8704 if (check_restricted() || check_secure())
8705 return NULL;
8706
8707 /* get a name for the temp file */
8708 if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL)
8709 {
8710 EMSG(_(e_notmp));
8711 return NULL;
8712 }
8713
8714 /* Add the redirection stuff */
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008715 command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008716 if (command == NULL)
8717 goto done;
8718
8719 /*
8720 * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored).
8721 * Don't check timestamps here.
8722 */
8723 ++no_check_timestamps;
8724 call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags);
8725 --no_check_timestamps;
8726
8727 vim_free(command);
8728
8729 /*
8730 * read the names from the file into memory
8731 */
8732# ifdef VMS
8733 /* created temporary file is not allways readable as binary */
8734 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r");
8735# else
8736 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN);
8737# endif
8738
8739 if (fd == NULL)
8740 {
8741 EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname);
8742 goto done;
8743 }
8744
8745 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END);
8746 len = ftell(fd); /* get size of temp file */
8747 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET);
8748
8749 buffer = alloc(len + 1);
8750 if (buffer != NULL)
8751 i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd);
8752 fclose(fd);
8753 mch_remove(tempname);
8754 if (buffer == NULL)
8755 goto done;
8756#ifdef VMS
8757 len = i; /* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */
8758#endif
8759 if (i != len)
8760 {
8761 EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname);
8762 vim_free(buffer);
8763 buffer = NULL;
8764 }
8765 else
8766 buffer[len] = '\0'; /* make sure the buffer is terminated */
8767
8768done:
8769 vim_free(tempname);
8770 return buffer;
8771}
8772#endif
8773
8774/*
8775 * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion
8776 * functions.
8777 */
8778 void
8779FreeWild(count, files)
8780 int count;
8781 char_u **files;
8782{
8783 if (files == NULL || count <= 0)
8784 return;
8785#if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */
8786 /*
8787 * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have
8788 * been used???
8789 */
8790 _fnexplodefree((char **)files);
8791#else
8792 while (count--)
8793 vim_free(files[count]);
8794 vim_free(files);
8795#endif
8796}
8797
8798/*
8799 * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'.
8800 * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping.
8801 * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command.
8802 */
8803 int
8804goto_im()
8805{
8806 return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed());
8807}